Compact 5000 I/O Digital

Modules
Catalog Numbers 5069-IA16, 5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK, 5069-IB16,
5069-IB16F, 5069-IB16K, 5069-IB6F-3W, 5069-OA16, 5069-OB8,
5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK, 5069-OB16, 5069-OB16F, 5069-
OB16K, 5069-OW4I, 5069-OW16, 5069-OX4I

User Manual Original Instructions

Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules User Manual

Important User Information

Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize
themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to
be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use
or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for
actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software
described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is
prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to
personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or
economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be
present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous
temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc Flash. Arc
Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work
practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

The following icon may appear in the text of this document.

Identifies information that is useful and can help to make a process easier to do or easier to understand.

Rockwell Automation recognizes that some of the terms that are currently used in our industry and in this
presentation are not in alignment with the movement toward inclusive language in technology.

We are proactively collaborating with industry peers to find alternatives to such terms and making changes to our
products and content. Please excuse the use of such terms in our content while we implement these changes.

2 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Table of Contents
Preface About This Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Download Firmware, AOP, EDS, and Other Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Summary of Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Graphics Indicate Feature Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Module Data Quality Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Appearance Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Before Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
After Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 1
Digital Module Operation in a Controller and Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Control System Controller Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Types of Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Local I/O Modules or Remote I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Local I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Secure Access to the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Multiple Owners of Compact 5000 I/O Standard
Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Configuration Changes in a Standard Input Module with
Multiple Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Construct a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Local I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Remote I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Use a 5069-ARM Address Reserve Module to Reserve a
Node Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Use a 5069-FPD Field Potential Distributor to Establish New SA
Power Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Requirements When You Use Compact 5000 I/O
Safety Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Configure the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connections with Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connections with Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Requested Packet Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Connection Over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Input Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Local Compact 5000 I/O Digital Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Trigger Events for Standard Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Remote Compact 5000 I/O Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 3

 Output Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Local Compact 5000 I/O Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Remote Compact 5000 I/O Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Listen Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Connection Over EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Additional Considerations With Listen Only Connections . . . . . . . 52
External Means . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Protected Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Considerations Specific to Safety Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Overall System Safety Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Single-channel or Dual-channel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Use with Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Determine Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Obtain Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Safety Application Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Safe State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuration Signature and Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Reset Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules to Out-of-Box State . . . . 62

Chapter 2
Features Common to Compact Input Module Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5000 I/O Digital Modules Output Module Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Software Configurable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Module Data Quality Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fault and Status Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Module Inhibiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Electronic Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Module Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Producer/Consumer Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Use CIP Sync Time with Fast
I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3
Input Module Features Multiple Input Module Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Data Transfer at RPI or Change of State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Software Configurable Input Filters and Delays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Compact 5000 I/O Standard Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Input Filter with Compact 5000 I/O Fast Input Modules. . . . . . . . . 78
Module Health Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fault and Status Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Compact 5000 I/O Standard Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Simple Count Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Sequence of Events Per Point Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chatter Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Event Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Independent Point Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Pattern Match Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Additional Event Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Pulse Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Field Power Loss Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Short Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Muting Lamp Fault and Short Circuit Diagnostics Triggered . . . . 94
Test Output Recovery After Overload or Short Circuit to
Ground Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Thermal Shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 5

 Chapter 4
Output Module Features Multiple Output Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Module Health Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Data Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Field Power Loss Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
No Load Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
No Load Detection with Safety Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Short Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configure Internal Short Circuit Detection for 5069-OBV8S
and 5069-OBV8SK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Thermal Shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fault and Status Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Output State Change Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Configurable Channel-level Output State in Program Mode or
Fault Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Connection Fault Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Forcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Time-scheduled Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Isolated and Non-isolated Varieties of Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Chapter 5
Safety Module Features Safety Input Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Safety Application Suitability Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Use Test Output with a Safety Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Single-channel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Safety Input Fault Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Safety Input Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Muting Lamp Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Discrepancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Safety Output Module Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Safety Application Suitability Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Safety Output with Test Pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Single-channel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Dual-channel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Safety Output Fault Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fault and Status Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6
Configure a Standard Module Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Create a New Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Discover Local I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
New Local I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Discover Remote I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
New Remote I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Reserve an I/O Module Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Add the 5069-ARM Module to the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Delete the 5069-ARM Module from the Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Edit the Module Configuration Common Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
General Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Connection Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Module Info Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Edit 5069-IA16 Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Edit 5069-IB16 Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Counters Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Edit 5069-IB16F Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Counters Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Events Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Time Sync Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Edit 5069-IB6F-3W Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Counters Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Events Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Time Sync Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Edit 5069-OA16 Module Configuration Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Edit 5069-OB8 Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Edit 5069-OB16 Module Configuration Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Edit 5069-OB16F Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Edit 5069-OW4I Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Edit 5069-OW16 Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Edit 5069-OX4I Module Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
View the Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 7

 Chapter 7
Configure and Replace Safety Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Modules Create a New Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
New Local Safety Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
New Remote I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Edit the Module Configuration Common Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
General Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Connection Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Safety Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Module Info Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Edit the 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK Module
Configuration Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Input Points Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Test Output Points Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Edit the 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Module Points Category . . . 194
View the Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Replace a Safety Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Set the SNN Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Reset to Out-of-Box Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Replace a Module in a Logix 5000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Appendix A
Troubleshoot Your Module Module Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Compact 5000 I/O Standard Input Modules Status Indicators. . . . . . 203
Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules Status Indicators . . . . 205
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . 209
SA Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
I/O Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . 211
SA Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
I/O Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Use the Logix Designer Application for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Warning Signal in the I/O Configuration Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Status and Fault Information in Module Properties Categories . 214
Module and Point Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Logix Designer Application Tag Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Internal Fault Triggered on the Safety Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B
Module Tag Definitions Name Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tag for Local Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tag for Remote Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Access the Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
5069-IA16 Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
5069-IB16 Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5069-IB16F Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Event Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Event Output Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
5069-IB6F-3W Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Event Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Event Output Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
5069-OA16 Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5069-OB8 Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5069-OB16 Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5069-OB16F Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
5069-OW4I, 5069-OW16, and 5069-OX4I Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Input Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Output Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 9
 Appendix C
Application and Wiring Examples Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
for Safety Modules Connection Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK Module Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Module Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . 259
Wiring Faults on Safety Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Appendix D
Safety Data for Safety Modules Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module Safety Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module Safety Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Safety Reaction Time - 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Modules 270

Appendix E
Module Diagnostic Assembly Create User-defined Diagnostic Assembly Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Create Message Type User Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Definitions for Diagnostic Assembly Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Preface

About This Publication This manual describes how to use Compact 5000™ I/O digital modules in
Logix 5000™ control systems.

Make sure that you are familiar with the following:

• Use of a controller in a Logix 5000 control system.
• Use of an EtherNet/IP™ network, if the digital I/O modules are
used remotely.
• Use of safety systems.
• Use Studio 5000 Logix Designer® environment.

IMPORTANT In this manual, we use standard module to indicate a standard digital I/O
module. We use safety module to indicate a safety digital I/O module.
Further, we use Compact 5000 I/O digital module to indicate when a
concept or task applies to both the standard and safety digital I/O modules.

IMPORTANT The Compact 5000 I/O Serial module is only compatible with the
following controllers:
• CompactLogix™ 5380
• Compact GuardLogix™ 5380
• CompactLogix 5480
• ControlLogix® 5580
• GuardLogix 5580

Rockwell Automation recognizes that some of the terms that are currently
used in our industry and in this presentation are not in alignment with the
movement toward inclusive language in technology.
We are proactively collaborating with industry peers to find alternatives to
such terms and making changes to our products and content. Please excuse
the use of such terms in our content while we implement these changes.

Download Firmware, AOP, Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access
EDS, and Other Files product release notes from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at
rok.auto/pcdc.

Summary of Changes This publication contains the following new or updated information. This list
includes substantive updates only and is not intended to reflect all changes.
Upda

Topic Page
Updated Table 28 104
Added Figure: Configure No Load Detection—Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules 104
Added Section: Configure Internal Short Circuit Detection for 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK 109
Updated Tip 139
Updated Figure: Configure Points 194
Updated Figure: Point Diagnostics 217

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 11

Graphics Indicate Module Data Quality Reporting
Feature Support Throughout this manual, graphics appear with section titles to indicate the
digital I/O modules that support the feature that is described in that section.

If both standard and safety modules support a feature, you see icons for
both types.
Standard Modules Safety Modules

Timestamping
If only one type of module, standard or safety, supports a feature, you see only
one type of icon.
Standard Modules

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

Appearance Change The appearance of the CompactLogix Series A Controllers has been updated.

Before Change.

CompactLogix 5380 Controller Compact GuardLogix 5380 SIL 2 Controller Compact GuardLogix 5380 SIL 3 Controller

After Change.

CompactLogix 5380 Controller Compact GuardLogix 5380 SIL 2 Controller Compact GuardLogix 5380 SIL 3 Controller

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 13

Terminology The following table defines terms that are used in this manual.

Table 1 - Terminology Used throughout the Manual

Abbreviation Full Term Definition
1oo2 One out of Two Identifies the programmable electronic controller architecture.
An industrial communication protocol that is used by Logix 5000-based automation systems on EtherNet/IP,
CIP Common Industrial Protocol ControlNet®, and DeviceNet® communication networks.
CIP Safety Common Industrial Protocol – Safety Certified SIL-rated version of CIP™.
Logical communication channel for communication between nodes. Connections are maintained and controlled
— Connection between masters and slaves.
CL Claim Limit The max safety integrity level (SIL) that can be achieved.
DC Diagnostic Coverage The ratio of the detected failure rate to the total failure rate.
EN European Norm. The official European Standard.
A ladder logic instruction that retrieves specified controller status information and places it in a
GSV Get System Value destination tag.
— Multicast The transmission of information from one sender to multiple receivers.
MTTF Mean Time to Failure The length of time that a device or other product is expected to provide excellent reliability in operation.
NAT Network Address Translation The translation of an Internet Protocol (IP) address to another IP address on another network.
ODVA Open DeviceNet™ Vendor Association A nonprofit association of vendors that are established for the promotion of CIP networks.
Probability of a dangerous failure
PFD The average probability of a system to fail to perform its design function on demand.
on demand
Average frequency of a dangerous failure
PFH The probability of a system to have a dangerous failure occur per hour.
per hour
PL Performance Level ISO 13849-1 safety rating.
Periodic test that detects failures in a safety-related system so that, if necessary, the system can be restored to
— Proof test an as-new condition or as close as practical to this condition.
A confidence that the systematic safety integrity meets the requirements of the specified safety integrity level
SC Systematic Capability (SIL). (from IEC 61508-4)
SFF Safe Failure Fraction The sum of safe failures plus the sum of dangerous detected failures divided by the sum of all failures.
SIL Safety Integrity Level A relative level of risk-reduction that is provided by a safety function, or to specify a target level of risk reduction.
SIL CL SL Claim Limit The max safety integrity level (SIL) that can be achieved.
Safety network number, which uniquely identifies a network across all networks in the safety system. You are
SNN Safety Network Number responsible for assigning a unique number for each safety network or safety subnet within a system.
SRT Safety Reaction Time A consideration of delays or latencies within the safety system.
— Standard Devices or portions of devices that do not participate in the safety function.
— Unicast The transmission of information from one sender to one receiver.

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1

Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Topic Page
Controller and Software Compatibility 16
Types of Modules 18
Module Overview 19
Local I/O Modules or Remote I/O Modules 20
Secure Access to the System 25
Ownership 26
Construct a System 28
Power the Modules 30
Configure the Modules 36
Input Module Operation 43
Output Module Operation 45
Listen Only 49
External Means 53
Protected Operations 54
Considerations Specific to Safety Modules 55

Logix 5000™ controllers use Compact 5000™ I/O digital modules to control
devices in a control system.
Compact 5000 I/O digital modules use removable terminal blocks (RTBs) to
connect field-side wiring. You use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer®
application to configure the modules.

IMPORTANT Controller and programming software compatibility requirements apply

when you use Compact 5000 I/O digital modules.
For more information on controller and software compatibility, see
Controller and Software Compatibility on page 16.

Compact 5000 I/O digital modules use the Producer/Consumer network

communication model. This communication is an intelligent data exchange
between modules and other system devices in which each module produces
data without first being polled.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 15

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Controller and Software Controller and programming software compatibility requirements apply when
Compatibility you use Compact 5000 I/O digital modules.

Standard Modules
Controller Compatibility
Compatibility between Logix 5000 controllers and Compact 5000 I/O digital
modules varies based on module type and location. That is, whether the
module is a standard or safety I/O module and whether the module is local
or remote.

For example, CompactLogix™ 5380 and CompactLogix 5480 controllers are

compatible with local or remote Compact 5000 I/O standard modules.
Compact GuardLogix® 5380 controllers are compatible with local or remote
Compact 5000 I/O digital modules.

Software Compatibility
Compact 5000 I/O digital modules are supported in different minimum
versions of the Logix Designer application.

For example, Compact 5000 I/O standard modules support the Logix Designer
application, version 28 or later. Compact 5000 I/O safety modules support the
Safety Modules Logix Designer application, version 32 or later.

For more information on compatibility requirements, see Table 2 on page 17

Table 2 describes the module compatibility requirements when you use

Compact 5000 I/O digital modules with Logix 5000 controllers.

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Table 2 - Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules Controller and Software Compatibility Requirements
Controllers Logix Designer
Modules Location
System Cat. Nos. Application
5069-L320ER, 5069-L320ERMK, 5069-L330ERMK, 5069-L340ERM, Version 28.00.00 or later
5069-L350ERMK
5069-L306ER, 5069-L306ERM, 5069-L310ER, 5069-L310ERM,
CompactLogix 5380 5069-L310ERMK, 5069-L310ER-NSE, 5069-L310ERS2, Version 29.00.00 or later
5069-L320ERM, 5069-L320ERMK, 5069-L320ERP, 5069-L330ER, 5069-
L330ERM, 5069-L330ERMK, 5069-L340ER, 5069-L340ERP
5069-L350ERM, 5069-L350ERMK, 5069-L380ERM, 5069-L3100ERM Version 30.00.00 or later
5069-L46ERMW Version 32.00.00 or later
Local I/O modules CompactLogix 5480 5069-L430ERMW, 5069-L450ERMW, 5069-L4100ERMW, Version 32.01.00 or later
5069-L4200ERMW
5069-L306ERS2, 5069-L306ERMS2, 5069-L310ERS2,
5069-L310ERMS2, 5069-L320ERS2, 5069-L320ERS2K,
5069-L320ERMS2, 5069-L320ERMS2K, 5069-L330ERS2,
5069-5069-L330ERS2K, L330ERMS2, 5069-L330ERMS2K,
Compact GuardLogix 5380 Version 31.00.00 or later
5069-L340ERS2, 5069-L340ERMS2, 5069-L350ERS2,
Standard Modules 5069-L350ERS2K, 5069-L350ERMS2, 5069-L350ERMS2K,
5069-IA16, 5069-IB16, 5069-L380ERS2, 5069-L380ERMS2, 5069-L3100ERS2,
5069-IB16F, 5069- 5069-L3100ERMS2
IB16K, 5069-IB6F-3W, 5069-L320ER, 5069-L340ERM Version 28.00.00 or later
5069-OA16, 5069-OB8,
5069-OB16, 5069- 5069-L306ER, 5069-L306ERM, 5069-L310ER, 5069-L310ERM,
OB16F, 5069-OB16K, 5069-L310ERMK, 5069-L310ER-NSE, 5069-L310ERS2,
CompactLogix 5380 Version 29.00.00 or later
5069-OW4I, 5069- 5069-L320ERM, 5069-L320ERP, 5069-L330ER, 5069-L330ERM, 5069-
OW16, 5069-OX4I L340ER, 5069-L340ERP
5069-L350ERM, 5069-L380ERM, 5069-L3100ERM Version 30.00.00 or later
5069-L46ERMW Version 32.00.00 or later
CompactLogix 5480 5069-L430ERMW, 5069-L450ERMW, 5069-L4100ERMW, Version 32.01.00 or later
5069-L4200ERMW
Remote I/O modules 5069-L306ERS2, 5069-L306ERMS2, 5069-L310ERS2,
5069-L310ERMS2, 5069-L320ERS2, 5069-L320ERS2K,
5069-L320ERMS2, 5069-L320ERMS2K, 5069-L330ERS2,
5069-5069-L330ERS2K, L330ERMS2, 5069-L330ERMS2K,
Compact GuardLogix 5380 Version 31.00.00 or later
5069-L340ERS2, 5069-L340ERMS2, 5069-L350ERS2,
5069-L350ERS2K, 5069-L350ERMS2, 5069-L350ERMS2K,
5069-L380ERS2, 5069-L380ERMS2, 5069-L3100ERS2,
5069-L3100ERMS2
1756-L83E, 1756-L85E Version 28.00.00 or later
ControlLogix® 5580
1756-L81E, 1756-L82E, 1756-L84E Version 29.00.00 or later
GuardLogix 5580 1756-L81ES, 1756-L82ES, 1756-L83ES, 1756-L84ES Version 31.00.00 or later
5069-L306ERS2, 5069-L306ERMS2, 5069-L310ERS2,
5069-L310ERMS2, 5069-L320ERS2, 5069-L320ERS2K,
5069-L320ERMS2, 5069-L320ERMS2K, 5069-L330ERS2,
5069-5069-L330ERS2K, L330ERMS2, 5069-L330ERMS2K,
Local Compact GuardLogix 5380 5069-L340ERS2, 5069-L340ERMS2, 5069-L350ERS2,
5069-L350ERS2K, 5069-L350ERMS2, 5069-L350ERMS2K,
5069-L380ERS2, 5069-L380ERMS2, 5069-L3100ERS2,
Safety Modules 5069-L3100ERMS2
5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK, 5069-L306ERS2, 5069-L306ERMS2, 5069-L310ERS2, Version 32.00.00 or later
5069-OBV8S, 5069-L310ERMS2, 5069-L320ERS2, 5069-L320ERS2K,
5069-OBV8SK 5069-L320ERMS2, 5069-L320ERMS2K, 5069-L330ERS2,
5069-5069-L330ERS2K, L330ERMS2, 5069-L330ERMS2K,
Compact GuardLogix 5380
Remote 5069-L340ERS2, 5069-L340ERMS2, 5069-L350ERS2,
5069-L350ERS2K, 5069-L350ERMS2, 5069-L350ERMS2K,
5069-L380ERS2, 5069-L380ERMS2, 5069-L3100ERS2,
5069-L3100ERMS2
GuardLogix 5580 1756-L81ES, 1756-L82ES, 1756-L83ES, 1756-L84ES

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 17

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Types of Modules Table 3 describes the Compact 5000 I/O digital modules.
Table 3 - Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules
Standard Modules
Module Type Cat. No. Description
5069-IA16 79…264V AC 16-point, input module
5069-IB16 10…32V DC 16-point, sinking input module
5069-IB16K 10…32V DC 16-point, conformal coated sinking input module
5069-IB16F 10…32V DC 16-point, sinking fast input module
5069-IB6F-3W 10…32V DC 6-point, 3-wire, sinking fast input module
5069-OA16 85…264V AC 16-point, output module
Standard 5069-OB8 10…32V DC 8-point, sourcing high-current output module
5069-OB16 10…32V DC 16-point, sourcing output module
5069-OB16K 10…32V DC 16-point, conformal coated sourcing output module
5069-OB16F 10…32V DC 16-point, sourcing fast output module
5069-OW4I 5…264V AC /125V DC 4-point, isolated normally open relay output module
5069-OW16 5…264V AC/125V DC 16-point, normally open relay output module
5…264V AC /125V DC 4-point, isolated normally open/normally closed relay output
5069-OX4I module
5069-IB8S 18…32V DC 8-point, safety sinking input module
5069-IB8SK 18…32V DC 8-point, conformal coated safety sinking input module
Safety Modules 18…32V DC 8-point, safety output module that can be used as follows:
5069-OBV8S • Bipolar output module
Safety(1) • Sourcing output module
18…32V DC 8-point, conformal coated safety output module that can be used as
follows:
5069-OBV8SK • Bipolar output module
• Sourcing output module
(1) You can use the safety modules in applications that are rated up to, and including, SIL CL 3, PLe, Cat. 4 as defined in IEC 61508, IEC
61511, IEC 62061, and ISO 13849-1.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Module Overview Figure 1 shows the parts of a Compact 5000 I/O digital module.

IMPORTANT Compact 5000 I/O safety modules look the same from the front with the
Standard Modules exception that the safety modules have a red housing.

Figure 1 - Example Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

Safety Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 19

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Table 4 - Compact 5000 I/O Digital Module Parts

Item Item Description
1 DIN rail latch Locks the module on the DIN rail.
Standard modules:
Module and • STATUS - Displays the status of communication and module health.
2 power status Safety modules:
indicators • MOD Status - Displays the status of communication and module health.
• SA - Displays whether SA power is applied to the module.
I/O status
3 Displays the status of the input/output point.
indicators
Interlocking
4 Securely installs Compact 5000 I/O digital modules in the system.
pieces
5 RTB handle Anchors the RTB on the module.
6 RTB Provides a wiring interface for the module.
MOD power bus Pass system-side and field-side power across the internal circuitry of the module in a
7 and SA power Compact 5000 I/O system. The connectors are isolated from each other.
bus connectors
8 RTB lower tab Hooks RTB onto the module to begin installation.
9 Lower hook Used with cable tie after you wire the module.

Local I/O Modules or You can use Compact 5000 I/O digital modules as local or remote
Remote I/O Modules I/O modules, with some restrictions that are based on the module and
controller type. Compatibility requirements apply and are described in
Controller and Software Compatibility on page 16.

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Local I/O Modules

When Compact 5000 I/O digital modules reside in the same system as the
controller, the modules are local I/O modules.

Local I/O modules are installed to the right of the controller and exchange data
with the controller over the system backplane.
Figure 2 - Local Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

CompactLogix 5380 Controller Local Compact 5000 I/ CompactLogix 5480 Controller Local Compact 5000 I/O Standard
O Standard Modules Modules

Local Compact 5000 I/O Digital

Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller
Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 21

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Remote I/O Modules

When Compact 5000 I/O digital modules reside in a separate location from
Logix 5000 controllers, they are remote I/O modules. Remote Compact 5000 I/
O digital modules are accessible over an EtherNet/IP™ network via a Compact
5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter.
The modules are installed to the right of the adapter and exchange data across
the remote system backplane. The data is then exchanged with the controller
over the EtherNet/IP network.

IMPORTANT Remember, some restrictions apply when you use the I/O modules
remotely. For example, you can use Compact 5000 I/O safety modules
as remote I/O modules only in Compact GuardLogix 5380 or GuardLogix
5380 control systems.

Figure 3 shows remote Compact 5000 I/O standard modules in an example

CompactLogix 5380 control system.
Figure 3 - Remote Compact 5000 I/O Standard Modules in a CompactLogix 5380 Control Applications

CompactLogix 5380 Controller

Compact 5000 I/O Standard Modules
Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter
Compact 5000 I/O Standard Modules

Stratix® 5400 Switch

PanelView™ Plus 7 Terminal

Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter

Compact 5000 I/O Standard Modules
PowerFlex® 527 Drive Kinetix® 5500 Drive

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Figure 4 shows remote Compact 5000 I/O safety modules in a

Compact GuardLogix 5380 control application.
Figure 4 - Remote Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules in a Compact GuardLogix 5380 Control Application
Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller
Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules
Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules

Stratix 5400 Switch

PanelView Plus 7 Terminal

Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter

PowerFlex 527 Drive Kinetix 5500 Drive Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 23

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Figure 5 shows remote Compact 5000 I/O safety modules in a GuardLogix 5580
control application.
Figure 5 - Remote Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules in a GuardLogix 5580 Control Application
GuardLogix 5580 Safety Controller
GuardLogix 1756-L8SP Safety Partner Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules

Stratix 5400 Switch

PanelView Plus 7 Terminal

Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP Adapter

Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules
PowerFlex 527 Drive Kinetix 5500 Drive

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Secure Access to the To secure access to a Logix 5000 controller, Compact 5000 EtherNet/IP
System adapter, or I/O module by authorized users only, consider the
following options:
• Password protect the source and execution of the control program.
Standard Modules
• Deploy EtherNet/IP devices in accordance with recommended
architectures and concepts. See the Converged Plantwide Ethernet
(CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide, publication ENET-TD001.
• Implement physical barriers, such as locked cabinets.

To secure access to the system, consider the following options:

• Follow industry best practices to harden your PCs and servers, including
anti-virus/anti-malware and application whitelisting solutions.
The recommendations are published at the Rockwell Automation®
technical support center in Knowledgebase article Rockwell Automation
Customer Hardening Guidelines, #546987.
The technical support center is available at:
Rok.auto/knowledgebase
• Develop and deploy backup and disaster recovery policies and
procedures. Test backups on a regular schedule.
• Minimize network exposure for all control system devices and systems,
and make sure that they are not accessible from the Internet.
Safety Modules • Locate control system networks and devices behind firewalls and isolate
them from the business network.
• Subscribe to Knowledgebase article Industrial Security Advisory Index,
#54102 at the Rockwell Automation technical support center so you have
access to information about security matters that affect Rockwell
Automation products.
The technical support center is available at:
Rok.auto/knowledgebase

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 25

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Ownership Every I/O module in a Logix 5000 control system must be owned by a
controller, also known as the owner-controller. When a Compact 5000 I/O
digital module is used in a Logix 5000 control system, the owner-controller
Standard Modules performs the following:
• Stores configuration data for every module that it owns.
• Can reside in a location that differs from the Compact 5000 I/O
digital modules.
• Sends the I/O module configuration data to define module behavior and
begin operation in the control system.

Each Compact 5000 I/O digital module must continuously maintain

communication with its owner-controller during normal operation.

IMPORTANT The following modules are restricted to one owner-controller:

• Compact 5000 I/O standard output modules
• Compact 5000 I/O safety modules

Multiple Owners of Compact 5000 I/O Standard Input Modules

Safety Modules
Multiple Logix 5000 controllers can connect to Compact 5000 I/O standard
input modules as owner-controllers.

In this case, the following conditions must exist:

• The controllers maintain the same configuration.
• The configuration in each controller uses a Data connection to the
input module.
• The first controller to make a connection to the input module is the only
controller that can change the connection. Therefore, it is ‘owns’ the
module configuration.

IMPORTANT If the controller that owns the module configuration changes the
configuration, the other controllers are not notified of the changes.
For more information, see Configuration Changes in a Standard Input
Module with Multiple Owners on page 27.
• The controllers that do maintain, but do not ‘own’, the module
configuration are similar to Listen-only controllers.
The difference between the controllers is that the controllers that
maintain, but do not own, the module configuration can use a Multicast
or Unicast connection over the EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on Listen-only controllers,
see Listen Only on page 49.

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Configuration Changes in a You must be careful when changing the configuration data of an input module
Standard Input Module with in a multiple-owner scenario. If the configuration data is changed in owner A
and sent to the module, the changed configuration data is accepted as the new
Multiple Owners configuration for the module. Owner B continues to listen unaware that any
changes have been made in the behavior of the input module, as illustrated.
Figure 6 - Module Configuration Changes with Multiple Owners

Controller A sends new configuration to the module. Controller B is unaware of any configuration changes.

IMPORTANT A message in Logix Designer application alerts you to the possibility of a

multiple owner-controller situation and lets you inhibit the connection
before changing the module configuration. When changing the configuration
for a module with multiple owners, we recommend that you inhibit the
connection.

To help prevent other owner-controllers from receiving potentially erroneous

data, use the following steps when changing the configuration of a module in a
multiple owner scenario while online.
1. For each owner-controller, inhibit the connection to the module either in
the software on the Connection tab or the message dialog box warning
you of the multiple owner condition.
2. Make the appropriate configuration data changes in the software.
For more information on how to use the Logix Designer application to
change the configuration, see the following:
- Standard modules - Chapter 6,
Configure a Standard Module on page 143
- Safety modules - Chapter 7,
Configure and Replace Safety Modules on page 183
3. Repeat step 1 and step 2 for all owner-controllers, to make the exact same
changes in each.
4. Clear the Inhibit checkbox in each owner-controller configuration.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 27

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Construct a System Before you use your Compact 5000 I/O digital modules, you must complete
tasks that are based on whether the modules are local or remote I/O modules.
Standard Modules
Local I/O Modules
Complete the following steps.
1. Install a CompactLogix 5380, CompactLogix 5480, or
Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller.

IMPORTANT You must use a Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller if the local Compact
5000 I/O digital modules includes safety modules.
For more information on controller compatibility,
see Controller and Software Compatibility on page 16.
2. Install the modules to the right of the controller.
3. Install the end cap on the last module in the local system.

IMPORTANT The end cap in a CompactLogix 5380, CompactLogix 5480, or Compact

GuardLogix 5380 control system covers the exposed interconnection on the
last module on the DIN rail.
If you do not install an end cap on the last module on the DIN rail, equipment
Safety Modules damage or injury can occur.

Remote I/O Modules

Complete the following:
1. Install a controller that is compatible with the remote Compact 5000
I/O digital modules to be used in the application via an EtherNet/IP
network.

IMPORTANT Remember, you must use a Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller or

GuardLogix 5580 controller if the set of remote Compact 5000 I/O digital
modules include safety modules.
For more information on controller compatibility,
see Controller and Software Compatibility on page 16.
2. Install an EtherNet/IP network.
3. Connect the controller to the network.
4. Install a Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter.
5. Connect the adapter to the network.
6. Install the Compact 5000 I/O digital modules to the right of
the adapter.
7. Install the end cap on the last module in the local system.

IMPORTANT The end cap in a CompactLogix 5380, CompactLogix 5480, or Compact

GuardLogix 5380 control system covers the exposed interconnection on the
last module on the DIN rail.
If you do not install an end cap on the last module on the DIN rail, equipment
damage or injury can occur.

For information on how to install compatible controllers, adapters,

and Compact 5000 I/O modules, see the publications that are listed in
Additional Resources on page 287.

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Use a 5069-ARM Address Reserve Module to Reserve a Node Address

Every Compact 5000 I/O digital module has a unique node address in a system.
As modules are installed, the node addresses increment. The Logix Designer
application project includes modules in the I/O Configuration that correspond
to the physical modules.
If a module is not available during initial system installation and operation,
you can use a 5069-ARM address reserve module to reserve the slot in the
system. That is, you install the 5069-ARM address reserve module to reserve
the node address. The address reserve module remains installed until the I/O
module is available.
When you install the address reserve module, you also make sure that the
subsequently-installed modules are at the correct node address.
You use the corresponding entry in the Logix Designer application project to
reserve the node address. That is, when you add modules to the I/O
Configuration tree in the project, you add an address reserve module at the
node address that matches the physical module location.
Figure 7 - CompactLogix 5380 Control System with a 5069-ARM Address Reserve Module
5069-ARM Address Reserve Module




When the I/O becomes available, you complete the following tasks.
1. Remove the 5069-ARM module from the system.
2. Install the I/O module in the slot that previously contained the
5069-ARM module.
3. Replace the 5069-ARM module entry in the I/O Configuration section of
the Logix Designer application project with the new I/O module.
For more information on how to use a 5069-ARM module in a Logix
Designer application project, see
Reserve an I/O Module Slot on page 152.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 29

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Power the Modules Compact 5000 I/O digital modules receive the following power types from first
component in the system, that is, the controller or adapter:
Standard Modules • System-side Power - Powers the system and lets modules transfer data
and execute logic.
System-side power is provided through the Module (MOD) Power
connector and is passed to each module as it is added to the system.
System-side power is also known as MOD power.
• Field-side Power - Powers field-side devices that are connected to some
Compact 5000 I/O digital modules.
Field-side power is provided through the sensor actuator (SA) Power
connector and is passed to each module as it is added to the system.
Field-side power is also known as SA power.

Power begins at the leftmost device in the system and passes across the I/O
module internal circuitry via power buses. The MOD power bus and SA power
buses are isolated from each other. The leftmost device is either a controller or
an EtherNet/IP adapter.

IMPORTANT Remember the following:

• A system has only one MOD power bus.
Safety Modules
• A system can have multiple SA power buses. The first SA power bus typically
starts at the controller or adapter, and 5069-FPD field potential distributors
let you establish new SA power buses in the same system.
For more information, see Use a 5069-FPD Field Potential Distributor to Establish
New SA Power Buses on page 31.
• Compact GuardLogix 5380 controllers only:
– You must use an SELV/PELV-listed power supply to provide MOD power and SA
power to the controller.
– Additional requirements exist when you power a functional safety application that
includes Compact 5000 I/O safety modules.
For more information on these requirements, see Power Requirements
When You Use Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules on page 33.

IMPORTANT Remember the following:

• DC-type modules and AC-type modules must be on separate SA power
buses.
The following Compact 5000 I/O digital modules are DC-type modules:
– 5069-IB8S
– 5069-IB8SK
– 5069-IB16
– 5069-IB16F
– 5069-IB16K
– 5069-IB6F-3W
– 5069-OB8
– 5069-OBV8S
– 5069-OBV8SK
– 5069-OB16
– 5069-OB16F
– 5069-OB16K
– 5069-OW4I
– 5069-OW16
– 5069-OX4I
The following Compact 5000 I/O digital modules are AC-type modules:
– 5069-IA16
– 5069-OA16
For more information on how to establish new SA power buses, see page 31.

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

For more information on how to power local Compact 5000 I/O digital
modules, see the following:
- CompactLogix 5380 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controllers User
Manual, publication 5069-UM001
- CompactLogix 5480 Controller User Manual, publication 5069-UM002
For more information on how to power remote Compact 5000 I/O digital
modules, see the Compact 5000 EtherNet/IP Adapters User Manual,
publication 5069-UM007.

Use a 5069-FPD Field Potential Distributor to Establish New SA

Power Buses
A 5069-FPD field potential distributor lets you change the field-side power
distribution source for Compact 5000 I/O modules to the right of the field
power distributor. The field potential distributor passes MOD power bus
signals through to the next module in the system.

You can use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a new SA power
bus in a system. The field potential distributor blocks the current that passes
across the SA power bus to the left of the field potential distributor. It then
establishes a new SA power bus for modules to the right.

The new SA power bus extends to the last module in the system or until
another field potential distributor establishes another SA power bus.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 31

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

The SA power bus that a field potential distributor establishes functions in the
same way as the SA power bus that a controller or adapter establishes.

Figure 8 shows a CompactLogix 5380 system that includes a field potential

distributor that isolates DC-type modules from AC-type modules.
Figure 8 - CompactLogix 5380 Controller System with 5069-FPD Field Potential Distributor
5069-FPD Field Potential Distributor

SA Power Bus For DC-type Modules SA Power Bus For AC-type Modules

IMPORTANT You must install DC-type modules and AC-type modules on separate SA
power buses.
You use 5069-FPD field potential distributors to establish SA power
buses that are separate from the SA power bus that the controller or
adapter establishes.
To install modules on separate SA power buses, complete the following
steps.
1.Install the controller or adapter.
The controller or adapter establishes the first SA power bus.
2. Install one type of modules to the right of the controller or adapter, for
example, DC-type modules.
3. Install a 5069-FPD field potential distributor.
The field potential distributor establishes a new SA power bus that
is isolated from the first one.
4. Install the other type of modules to the right of the field potential
distributor, for example, AC-type modules.
Additional requirements apply when you use a 5069-FPD field
potential distributor in a local or remote system with Compact 5000
I/O safety modules.
For more information on the additional requirements, see Power
Requirements When You Use Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules on
page 33

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Power Requirements When You Use Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules
This section describes the requirements that apply when you connect MOD
power and SA power to a system that includes both types of Compact 5000
I/O digital modules.

There is some variation in the requirements based on whether the safety

modules are used as local or remote I/O modules. That is, if the modules are
installed in a Compact GuardLogix 5380 system or a Compact 5000 I/O system
accessible over an EtherNet/IP network.

Power a Compact GuardLogix 5380 System That Includes Compact 5000 I/O
Safety Modules

Table 5 describes requirements that apply when you connect MOD power and
SA power to a Compact GuardLogix 5380 system with a mix of standard and
safety modules.
Table 5 - Connect Power to a Compact GuardLogix 5380 System with Compact 5000 I/O Standard and Safety Modules
Power Requirements Example System
Type

SELV/PELV-listed +
24V DC
Power Supply -

• You must use an SELV/PELV-listed 24V DC

power supply to provide MOD power to
the controller.
MOD • The total continuous current draw across
Power the MOD power bus must not be more MOD Power
than 5 A max at 18…24V DC.
We recommend that you calculate the
total MOD power bus current draw as you
install modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 33

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Table 5 - Connect Power to a Compact GuardLogix 5380 System with Compact 5000 I/O Standard and Safety Modules
Power Requirements Example System
Type

• You must use an SELV/PELV-listed power

supply to provide SA power to the
controller.
• You must use a 24V DC power supply to
provide SA power to the controller.
• The total continuous current draw across
an SA power bus must not be more than Compact 5000 I/O safety Compact 5000 I/O
10 A max at 18…24V DC. Compact 5000 I/O
modules and 24V DC 120/240V AC
• You can install only Compact 5000 I/O safety modules
standard input modules standard modules
safety modules and non-relay DC-type
standard modules next to the safety
controller.
IMPORTANT: This requirement is related to
the controller, not the I/O modules.
However, you can install safety modules
and non-relay DC-type modules to the right SA Power SA Power SA Power
of a 5069-FPD field potential distributor.
• If you install safety modules to the right of
SA Power a field potential distributor, you must use
an SELV/PELV-listed power supply to
provide SA power.
• You must isolate the following groups of
modules on separate SA power buses: + 120/240V + +
24V DC 24V DC
– Safety and non-relay DC-type - AC - -
standard modules
– Relay DC-type modules
– AC-type modules
• If you install AC-type modules, you must
install them to the right a field potential
distributor. The 120/240V AC power SELV/PELV-listed Non SELV/PELV-listed Power Supply SELV/PELV-listed
supply that provides SA power is not Power Supply The modules on this SA power bus are 120/240V AC modules. Power Supply
required to be SELV/PELV-listed. This power supply can also be a non SELV/PELV-listed 24V DC
• If you install relay DC-type standard power supply, if necessary, based on system configuration.
modules, you must install them to the
The SA Power to adjacent SA Power electrical isolation that the
right of a field potential distributor. The
24V DC power supply that provides SA 5069-FPD field potential distributor provides has a rating of 240V
power is not required to be AC (continuous) reinforced insulation type.
SELV/PELV-listed.

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Power a Remote Compact 5000 I/O System That Includes Compact 5000 I/O
Safety Modules

Table 6 describes requirements that apply when you connect MOD power and
SA power to a Compact 5000 I/O system with standard and safety modules.
Table 6 - Connect Power to a Compact 5000 I/O System with Standard and Safety Modules
Power Requirements Example System
Type

SELV/PELV-listed +
24V DC -
Power Supply

• You must use an SELV/PELV-listed power

supply to provide MOD power to the
controller.
• The total continuous current draw across
MOD the MOD power bus must not be more
Power than 10 A max at 18…24V DC.
We recommend that you calculate the total
MOD power bus current draw as you install
modules. MOD Power

• You must use an SELV/PELV-listed power

supply to provide SA power to the
adapter. Compact 5000 I/O safety Compact 5000 I/O
• You must use a 24V DC power supply to Compact 5000 I/O
modules and 24V DC 120/240V AC
provide SA power to the adapter. safety modules
standard input module standard modules
• The total continuous current draw across
an SA power bus must not be more than
10 A max at 18…24V DC.
• If you install safety modules to the right of
a field potential distributor, you must use
an SELV/PELV-listed power supply to SA Power SA Power SA Power
provide SA power.
• You must isolate the following groups of
modules on separate SA power buses:
SA Power – Safety and non-relay DC-type
standard modules
– Relay DC-type modules 120/240V
+ + +
– AC-type modules 24V DC 24V DC
- AC - -
• If you install AC-type modules, you must
install them to the right a field potential
distributor. The 120/240V AC power
supply that provides SA power is not
required to be SELV/PELV-listed.
• If you install relay DC-type standard
modules, you must install them to the Non SELV/PELV-listed Power Supply SELV/PELV-listed
SELV/PELV-listed The modules on this SA power bus are 120/240V AC modules.
right of a field potential distributor. The Power Supply Power Supply
24V DC power supply that provides SA Therefore, this must be a 120/240V AC power supply. However, it
power is not required to be can be a non SELV/PELV-listed power supply because there are
SELV/PELV-listed. no safety modules on the SA Power bus.
The SA Power to adjacent SA Power electrical isolation that the
5069-FPD field potential distributor provides has a rating of 240V
AC (continuous) reinforced insulation type.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 35

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Configure the Modules You must create a Logix Designer application project for the controller that
owns the Compact 5000 I/O digital modules. The project includes module
configuration data for the module.
Standard Modules
The Logix Designer application transfers the project to the owner-controller
during the program download. Data is then transferred to the I/O modules
either across the backplane or over an EtherNet/IP network.

The I/O modules can operate immediately after receiving the

configuration data.

IMPORTANT This section shows some Logix Designer application screens; it is not a
complete description of how to configure a module.
• For more information on how to use the Logix Designer application to
configure Compact 5000 I/O standard modules, see Chapter 6, Configure
a Standard Module on page 143.
• For more information on how to use the Logix Designer application to
configure Compact 5000 I/O safety modules, see Chapter 7, Configure
and Replace Safety Modules on page 183.

Connections with Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Safety Modules
During module configuration, you must define the module. Among the
Module Definition parameters with Compact 5000 I/O digital modules, you
must choose a connection type for the module. A connection is a real-time data
transfer link between the owner-controller and the module that occupies the
slot that the configuration references.

When you download module configuration to a controller, the controller

attempts to establish a connection to each module in the configuration.

Because part of module configuration includes a slot number in the local or

remote system, the owner-controller checks for the presence of a module
there. If a module is detected, the owner-controller sends the configuration.
One of the following occurs:
• If the configuration is appropriate to the module detected, a connection
is made and operation begins.
• If the configuration is not appropriate to the module detected, the data is
rejected and the Logix Designer application indicates that an error
occurred.
The configuration can be inappropriate for many reasons. For example, a
mismatch in electronic keying that helps prevent normal operation.

The owner-controller monitors its connection with a module. Any break in the
connection, for example, the loss of power to the system, causes a fault. The
Logix Designer application monitors the fault status tags to indicate when a
fault occurs on a module.

Connection Types That Are Available with Compact 5000 I/O Standard Modules

The Connection choice determines what data is exchanged between the

owner-controller and the module.

The following are example Module Definition dialog boxes, and available
Connection choices, for Compact 5000 I/O standard modules.

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

5069-IB16F Module 5069-OA16 Module

Table 7 describes the connection types that you can use with
Compact 5000 I/O standard modules.

Table 7 - Connections - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Modules

Description
Connection Type
Compact 5000 I/O Standard Input Modules Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules
The module returns the following to the owner-controller:
The module returns the following to the owner-controller:
• General input data
Data • General fault data
• General fault data
• Output data
• Counter data - Not available with all modules
The module returns the following to the owner-controller:
• General input data
• General fault data
• Input data time stamp
• Event input data time stamp
Data with Events(1) • Event fault data —
• Event input data
• Event output data
• Counter data - Not available with all modules. With the modules that can
provide counter data, they only provide it based on the Input Data
selection.
When a Listen Only Data connection is used, the controller that makes the connection does not own the module configuration. The ‘listening controller’
Listen Only Data merely listens to the data exchanged between the module and the owner-controller, that is, general input data and general fault data.
For more information on Listen Only Data connections, see Listen Only on page 49.
(1) Data with events is available on only the 5069-IB16F and 5069-IB6F-3W standard input modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 37

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Data Types Available with Compact 5000 I/O Standard Modules

The Module Definition includes a Data parameter that matches the module
type. Standard input modules use Input Data, and standard output modules
use Output Data.

The module type and Connection choice determine the available Input Data or
Output Data choices. For example, you can configure a 5069-IB16F input
module to use the Connection choice Data with Events. The resulting Input
Data choices are Data with Events include Data, Packed Data, or Timestamped
Data, as shown.

The 5069-IB16 input module does not support the Connection choice Data with
Events, however. As a result, the Input Data choice Timestamped Data is not
available.

For more information on how to use the Module Definition parameters with
Compact 5000 I/O digital modules, see the following:
• Module Definition on page 156
• Logix Designer application online help

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Connections with Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules

During module configuration, you must define the module. Among the
Module Definition parameters with Compact 5000 I/O safety modules, you
must choose how module is configured.

The choice depends on whether the project is downloaded to the controller that
owns the module configuration, that is, the owner-controller, or to a controller
that is listening to input modules in a project.

A real-time data transfer link is established between the controller and the
module that occupies the slot that the configuration references.
When you download module configuration to a controller, the controller
attempts to establish a connection to each module in the configuration.
Because part of module configuration includes a slot number in the local
Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller system or remote Compact 5000 I/O
system, the owner-controller checks for the presence of a module there. If a
module is detected, the owner-controller sends the configuration. One of the
following occurs:
• If the configuration is appropriate to the module detected, a connection
is made and operation begins.
• If the configuration is not appropriate to the module detected, the data is
rejected and the Logix Designer application indicates that an error
occurred.
The configuration can be inappropriate for many reasons. For example, a
mismatch in electronic keying that helps prevent normal operation.

The owner-controller monitors its connection with a module. Any break in the
connection, for example, the loss of power to a remote Compact 5000 I/O
system, causes a fault. The Logix Designer application monitors the fault
status tags to indicate when a fault occurs on a module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 39

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Configured by Options That Are Available with Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules

The Configured By choice determines what data is exchanged between the

owner-controller and the module. The following are example Module
Definition dialog boxes, and available Connection choices, for Compact 5000
I/O safety modules.
5069-IB8S Module 5069-OBV8S Module

Table 8 describes the connection types that you can use with Compact 5000
I/O safety modules.

Table 8 - Configured by Choices - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules

Configured by Description
Choice Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module
This choice directs the controller to configure the module.
The module returns the following to the owner-controller:
The module returns the following to the owner-controller: • General fault data
This Controller • General fault data • Safety input data
• Safety input data • Safety output data
• Muting lamp points IMPORTANT: When you choose This Controller, you must define the output
mode that the module uses, that is, sourcing or bipolar output mode.
This choice directs the controller to establish only a safety input connection. When the External Means is chosen, another controller owns the module.
A controller that uses this option does not write configuration for the module or control the Test Outputs. It merely listens to the data exchanged with the
External Means owner-controller. That is, it receives Safety input data.
For more information on the External Means option, see External Means on page 53. In this case, all other connections to the module, for example, the
connection to the owner-controller must also use the Multicast option.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Data Types Available with Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules

On the Module Definition dialog box for Compact 5000 I/O safety modules,
you must configure data type parameters.

Table 9 describes the available data type choices based on module type.
Table 9 - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules - Data Types
Catalog Number Supported Data Types Data Type Choices
Safety Data
Input Data Safety Packed Data
(1)
5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK There is not an Output Data field on the Module Definition dialog box in the Logix Designer application for the 5069-
Output Data IB8S module. However, if you enable Muting on points 02 and/or 03, output data is available in module output tags.
For more information on module tags, see Appendix B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219.
Safety Data
Input Data Safety Packed Data
Safety Data
Safety Packed Data
5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK(1) None
IMPORTANT: This field is automatically set based on how you configure the Configured By and Input Data parameters
Output Data on the Module Definition dialog box.
For example, if you configure a 5069-OBV8S module to use the Configured By parameter of This Controller and the
Input Data parameter of Safety Data, the Output Data field is automatically set to Safety Data and no other choices
are available.
(1) The conformal coated module catalog numbers are not available in the Logix Designer application. If your application uses a conformal coated module, you choose the non-conformal coated catalog
number when you add the module to the project.

Muting Lamp Points Available with Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module

The Module Definition for the 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK safety input
modules includes the Muting Lamp Points parameter. This parameter defines
what output points on the module, if any, are connected to muting lamps.

There is a corresponding test output point configuration when an output is

configured as a muting lamp output. The output drives a muting lamp. For
more information, see Muting Lamp Operation on page 133.

IMPORTANT If the Configured By parameter is External Means, the Muting Lamp

Points parameter is disabled. It is automatically set to None.

Output Mode Available with Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module

The Module Definition for the 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OBV8SK safety output

module includes the Output Mode parameter. This parameter defines whether
the module is operating in Sourcing or Bipolar mode.

IMPORTANT If the Configured By parameter is External Means, the Output Mode

parameter is disabled. It is automatically set to None.

For more information on the Module Definition parameters that are available
with Compact 5000 I/O digital modules, see the Logix Designer application.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 41

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Requested Packet Interval

The Requested Packet Interval (RPI) is a configurable parameter that defines a
rate at which the owner-controller and the module exchange data.

You set the RPI value during initial module configuration and can adjust
it as necessary after module operation has begun. The following are valid
RPI values:
• Compact 5000 I/O standard modules - 0.2…750 ms
• Compact 5000 I/O safety modules - 2…500 ms

IMPORTANT You can change the RPI while the project is online. If you change the RPI
while the project is online, however, the connection to the module is
closed and reopened in one of the following ways:
• You inhibit the connection to the module, change the RPI value, and
uninhibit the connection.
• You change the RPI value. In this case, the connection is closed and
reopened immediately after you apply the change to the module
configuration.

Connection Reaction Time Limit with Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules

With Compact 5000 I/O safety modules, the Connection Reaction Time Limit
configuration affects the module RPI.
The Connection Reaction Time Limit defines the predicted period of safety
packets on the associated connection. If the Max Network Delay exceeds the
Connection Reaction Time Limit, a connection fault occurs.

By default, the Connection Reaction Time Limit is four times the RPI.

Use the default values for Timeout Multiplier (2) and Network Delay Multiplier
(200). The Network Delay Multiplier value is in terms of percentage. Thus, 200
means 200%.

IMPORTANT To determine what is appropriate, analyze each safety channel. The

default Timeout Multiplier of 2 and Network Delay Multiplier of 200
creates a worst-case input connection reaction time limit of 4 times the
RPI, and an output connection reaction time limit of 3 times the RPI.
Changes to these parameters must be approved only after a thorough
review by a safety administrator.

For more information on how to specify RPI rates, see the following:
• Compact 5000 I/O standard modules - page 157
• Compact 5000 I/O safety modules - page 190
• Logix 5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual,
publication 1756-RM094

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Connection Over an EtherNet/IP Network

When you configure a remote Compact 5000 I/O digital module, you must
configure the Connection over EtherNet/IP parameter in the configuration for
the remote adapter that connects the I/O modules to the network. The
configuration choice dictates how input data is transmitted over the network.
The Compact 5000 I/O digital modules use one of the following methods to
transmit data:
• Multicast - Data is sent to all network devices.
If you are using the I/O modules in a redundancy system, you must
use Multicast.
• Unicast - Data is sent to one or more controllers depending on
module configuration.
Unicast is the default setting.

Input Module Operation Logix 5000 controllers do not poll the Compact 5000 I/O standard or safety
input modules for input data.
Standard Modules
The data exchange process between the input modules and the controller
differs based on whether the module is a local I/O module or remote
I/O module.

Local Compact 5000 I/O Digital Input Modules

Local Compact 5000 I/O digital input modules broadcast their input data, that
is, channel and status data, to the system backplane at the time that is defined
in the RPI.

At the RPI, the following events occur.

1. The local input module scans its channels for input data.
2. The module sends the data to the system backplane.
3. The controller receives the data immediately.

Safety Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 43

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Trigger Events for Standard Input Modules

IMPORTANT Compact 5000 I/O safety input modules cannot trigger events.

Some Compact 5000 I/O standard input modules can trigger an event.
For example, the modules can trigger the Event task. The event task lets
you execute a section of logic immediately when an event, or receipt of new
data, occurs.

The following can trigger events:

• An input state change.
• A counting input done bit change.
• A pattern of input state changes on multiple module inputs.

For more information on how to use a Compact 5000 I/O standard input
module to trigger an event, see Events on page 86.

Remote Compact 5000 I/O Digital Input Modules

Remote Compact 5000 I/O digital input modules broadcast their input data to
the Compact 5000 I/O system backplane at the time that is defined in the RPI.
The input data consists of channel and status data.

At the RPI, the following events occur.

1. The remote input module scans its channels for input data.
2. The module sends the data to the remote system backplane.
3. The Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter sends the data over the
EtherNet/IP network.
4. One of the following:
• If the controller is directly connected to the EtherNet/IP network, it
receives the input data immediately.
• If the controller is connected to the EtherNet/IP network through
another communication module, the module sends the data to its
backplane and the controller receives it.

IMPORTANT This can only be the case if a ControlLogix 5580 or GuardLogix 5580
controller owns the I/O module.
CompactLogix 5380, CompactLogix 5480, and Compact GuardLogix 5380
controllers do not support the use of an EtherNet/IP communication
module in the local system.

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Output Module Operation Logix 5000 controllers send data to Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules
at the RPI or after an Immediate Output (IOT) instruction is executed.
Standard Modules
The RPI defines when the controller sends data to an output module and when
the module echoes data. The IOT instruction sends new data to an output
module whenever new data is produced.

IMPORTANT CompactLogix 5380 and CompactLogix 5480 controllers can also send
data to Compact 5000 I/O standard output modules, that is, standard
modules, when an IOT instruction is executed.
Compact GuardLogix 5380 controllers cannot send data when an IOT
instruction is executed. You cannot use IOT instructions in safety
programs.
References to IOT instructions in this section apply only to
CompactLogix 5380 controllers.

At the RPI, not only does the controller send data to the output module, but
also the output module sends data to the controller. For example, the output
module sends an indication of the channel data quality.

IMPORTANT The RPI for a Compact 5000 I/O safety output module is the Safety Task
period. Safety output data is sent at the completion of the Safety
Safety Modules Task scan.

The data exchange process between Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules
and a controller differs based on whether the module is a local I/O module or
remote I/O module.

Local Compact 5000 I/O Digital Output Modules

Local Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules receive output data from a
controller and send data to the controller. The data exchange occurs over the
system backplane.

Controller to Local Output Module Data Transmission

The controller broadcasts data to its local backplane at one of the following:
• RPI
• An IOT instruction is executed.

IMPORTANT An IOT instruction sends data to the output module immediately, and
resets the RPI timer.
Compact GuardLogix 5380 controllers cannot send data when an IOT
instruction is executed. You cannot use IOT instructions in safety
programs.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 45

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Based on the RPI rate and the length of the controller program scan, the output
module can receive and echo data multiple times during one program scan.

When the RPI is less than the program scan length, the output channels can
change values multiple times during a program scan. The owner-controller
does not depend on the program scan to complete to send data.

The following events occur when the controller sends data to a local
Compact 5000 I/O output module.
1. The controller sends data to system backplane at the RPI or when an IOT
instruction is executed.
2. The local output module receives the data from the system backplane and
behaves as dictated by its configuration.

Local Output Module to Controller Data Transmission

When a local Compact 5000 I/O digital output module receives new data and
the requested data value is present on the RTB, the output module sends, or
‘echoes’, a data value back to the controller and to the rest of the control
system. The data value corresponds to the signal present at its terminals. This
feature is called Data Echo.

In addition to the Data Echo, the output module sends other data to the
controller at the RPI. For example, the module alerts the controller if a short
circuit condition exists on the module.
The following events occur when a local Compact 5000 I/O digital output
module sends data to the controller at the RPI.
1. The module sends the data to the system backplane.
2. The controller receives the data immediately.

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Remote Compact 5000 I/O Digital Output Modules

Remote Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules receive output data from a
controller and send data to the controller. The data exchange occurs over an
EtherNet/IP network.

Controller to Remote Output Module Data Transmission

The controller broadcasts data to its local backplane at one of the following:
• RPI
• An IOT instruction is executed.

IMPORTANT An IOT instruction sends data to all output modules in the system
immediately, and resets the RPI timer.

Based on the RPI rate and the length of the controller program scan, the output
module can receive and echo data multiple times during one program scan.

When the RPI is less than the program scan length, the output channels can
change values multiple times during a program scan. The owner-controller
does not depend on the program scan to complete to send data.

The following events occur when the controller sends data to a Compact 5000
I/O digital output module.
1. One of the following ways:
• If the controller is directly connected to the EtherNet/IP network, it
broadcasts data to the network.
In this case, skip to step 3.
• If the controller is connected to the EtherNet/IP network via a
communication module, the controller transmits the data to the backplane.
In this case, proceed to step 2.
2. The EtherNet/IP communication module transmits the data to the
EtherNet/IP network.
3. The Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter in the remote Compact 5000
I/O system receives the data from the network and transmits it to the
system backplane.
4. The remote output module receives the data from the backplane and
behaves as dictated by its configuration.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 47

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Remote Output Module to Controller Data Transmission

When a Compact 5000 I/O digital output module receives new data and the
requested data value is present on the RTB, the output module sends, or
‘echoes’, a data value back to the controller and to the rest of the control
system. The data value corresponds to the signal present at its terminals.
This feature is called Data Echo.

In addition to the Data Echo, the output module sends other data to the
controller at the RPI. For example, the module alerts the controller if a short
circuit condition exists on the module.

The following events occur when a remote Compact 5000 I/O digital output
module sends data to the controller at the RPI.
1. The module sends the data to the system backplane.
2. The Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter in the 5069 Compact
I/O™ system sends the data over the EtherNet/IP network.
3. One of the following:
• If the controller is directly connected to the EtherNet/IP network, it
receives the input data from the network without need for a
communication module.
• If the controller is connected to the EtherNet/IP network through
another communication module, the module transmits the data to its
backplane and the controller receives it.

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Listen Only The owner-controller, as described in Ownership on page 26, exchanges data
with I/O modules. The owner-controller owns the module configuration in its
Standard Modules Logix Designer application project.

Other controllers that do not own the module or exchange data with it can
listen to input data or ‘echoed’ output data. The listening controller does not
own the module configuration or exchange other data with the module.

During the I/O configuration process, you choose a Listen Only connection
type. The Connection pull-down menu is available on the Module Definition
dialog box.

For more information on how to access the Module Definition dialog box for
Compact 5000 I/O standard modules, see General Category on page 155.

IMPORTANT Listen Only connections include the following restrictions:

• The connection type is only available with Compact 5000 I/O
standard modules.
• The I/O modules must reside in a remote system. Controllers cannot
make Listen Only connections to local I/O modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 49

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Connection Over EtherNet/IP

You must set the Connection Over EtherNet/IP parameter when you
configure a remote Compact 5000 I/O module. The available choices are
Unicast and Multicast.

To establish a Listen Only connection from a listening controller, the

Connection over EtherNet/IP must be Multicast in both Logix Designer
application projects, that is, the owner-controller project and the listening
controller project.

The Connection over EtherNet/IP pull-down menu is available on the

Connection category.

For more information on the Connection category for Compact 5000 I/O
standard modules, see page 157.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Connection Request Errors

Module faults and connection request errors occur if the Connection

Over EtherNet/IP connection is not Multicast in both Logix Designer
application projects.

Information about the fault is available on the Connection category of the

Module Properties dialog box.

Table 10 describes the possible configuration combinations, and the result of

each, when you attempt to establish a Listen Only connection.
Table 10 - Connection Over EtherNet/IP Scenarios
Connection over EtherNet/IP Choice
Resulting Error Code
Owner-controller project Listening controller
project
Multicast Multicast None - Connection established successfully
16#0106 Connection Request Error: Module owned and
Multicast Unicast configured by another controller. Module may accept only
one connection if Unicast is used.
16#0108: Connection Request Error: Connection type
Unicast Unicast or Multicast (Multicast/Unicast) not supported.
Inhibited or powered-down Multicast 16#0119 Connection Request Error: Module not owned.

In some instances, the Logix Designer application lets you configure a module with
choices that result in connection request errors. However, the application does not
alert you to the error that occurs as a result of the choices until the project goes
online.
For example, if an owner-controller project uses Multicast and the listening controller
project uses Unicast, the result is a module fault and error code 16#106. However,
the Logix Designer application project in the listening controller only alerts you to the
error when the project goes online.
We recommend that you confirm the Connection Over EtherNet/IP choice in the
listening controller’s project is correct before you go online.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 51

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Additional Considerations With Listen Only Connections

Remember the following when you use Listen Only connections:
• Listening controllers receive data from the module as long
as the connection between the owner-controller and the module
is maintained.
If the connection between an owner-controller and the module is broken,
the module stops sending data and connections to all listening
controllers are also broken.
• When a controller uses a Listen Only Data connection, configurable
categories on the Module Properties dialog box are not available. And
only Input tags are created in the Module tags.
For example, shows the categories and module tags that appear when a
5069-IB16F module is configured in the owner-controller project with a
Data connection compared to when the same module is configured in
the listening controller project with a Listen Only connection.
Owner-controller Project Listening Controller Project

Categories on Points category

Module is not available.
Properties
dialog box

Module Tags
Only Input
Created
tags are
created.

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

External Means Any controller in the system can listen to the data from an I/O module. An
Safety Modules owner-controller, as described in Ownership on page 26, exchanges data with
I/O modules.

Controllers that do not own a module but must listen to data from it use the
following on the Module Definition dialog box:
• Compact 5000 digital safety I/O modules
—Configured By = External Means.

In this case, the ‘listening’ controller can only listen to input data. The listening
controller does not own the module configuration or exchange other data with
the module.

When the module is configured by External Means, you can disable the module
configuration signature. This disables the configuration validation check
when connections are made.

During the I/O configuration process, you can specify an External Means
connection. For more information on Connection options, see Module
Definition on page 189.

IMPORTANT Remember the following:

• If a controller uses External Means, the connection can be Multicast
or Unicast.
• Once a module has been configured by the owner-controller, External Means
connections can be created and maintained regardless of
owner state.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 53

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Protected Operations To maintain the secure operation of your Compact 5000 I/O digital modules,
operations that can disrupt module operation are restricted based on the
Standard Modules module operating mode.

Table 11 describes the restrictions.

Table 11 - Protected Operations on Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Activity
Current Connection
Module Firmware Module Electronic
Connection Configuration or Data RPI
Operation Update Reset Keying
Request Change Format Change
Request Request Change
Change
Connection Accepted
not running
Connection Rejected Accepted(1) Not allowed(3) Accepted(4)
running Accepted(2)

Firmware Rejected
update is in
process
(1) Only requests for Listen Only connections are accepted.
(2) Configuration change is accepted in the following scenarios:
Safety Modules - Changes are made in the Module Properties dialog box and you click Apply.
- Changes are made in the Configuration tags and you send a Reconfigure Module MSG to the module.
(3) The difference between Rejected and Not allowed is that rejected activities can be attempted in the Logix Designer application but
do not take effect. The activities that are not allowed, that is, attempts to change the Connection or Data Format used, do not occur
in the Logix Designer application.
For example, if you attempt to reset a module that is connected to the owner-controller, the Logix Designer application executes
the request and alerts you that it was rejected. If you attempt to change the data format on a module that is connected to an
owner-controller, the Logix Designer application does not execute the attempted change. The application only alerts you that the
change is not allowed. In the case, if the change is attempted online, the Module Definition dialog box field that changes the data
format is disabled.
(4) The change occurs after the connection is closed and reopened. You can close and reopen the connection in the
following ways:
- Change the project while it is offline and download the updated project before going online again.
- Change the project while it is online and click Apply or OK in the Module Properties dialog box. In this case, before the change is
made, a dialog box alerts you of the ramifications before the change is made.

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Considerations Specific to Compact 5000 I/O safety modules have additional items of which you must be
Safety Modules aware. Type approval, certification, and suitability for use in safety
applications vary by catalog number.
Safety Modules
IMPORTANT Functional safety certification and performance of Compact 5000 I/O
safety modules requires that the modules operate in conditions at or
below the ambient operating temperature specification.
The probability of a dangerous failure on demand (PFD) and average
frequency of a dangerous failure per hour (PFH) calculations for these
modules are based on the module operating conditions adhering to the
ambient operating temperature specification.
For more information on the maximum ambient operating temperature
specification for Compact 5000 I/O safety modules, see the Compact
5000 I/O Modules and EtherNet/IP Adapter Technical Data, publication
5069-TD001.

The following apply to the modules:

• Type-approved and certified for use in safety applications up to and
including SIL 3 per IEC 61508
• Suitable for use in safety applications up to and including SIL CL 3
per IEC 62061
• Suitable for use in safety applications up to and including Performance
Level e (PLe), category 4 per ISO 13849-1

IMPORTANT Requirements are based on the standards current at the time

of certification.
For more information on safety application suitability levels with the Compact
5000 I/O safety modules, see the following:
• 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK - Safety Input Module Features on page 125
• 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK - Safety Output Module Features on page 138

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 55

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Overall System Safety Function

The type approval, certification, and suitability levels for Compact 5000
I/O safety modules describe a system with an overall system safety function
of SIL 3.

However, just because the modules are rated for use in a system with a safety
function of SIL 3, you are not required to use Compact 5000 I/O safety modules
in those applications. You can use the modules in safety applications with an
overall system safety function that is less than SIL 3.

For example, Compact GuardLogix 5380 controllers are suitable for use in
safety applications that are rated up to, and including, SIL CL 2, PLd, Cat. 3 as
defined in IEC 61508, IEC 61511, IEC 62061, and ISO 13849-1.

In this case, the overall system safety function is SIL 2. You can use Compact
5000 I/O safety modules in this application even though the modules are rated
for use in systems with higher overall system safety function.

GuardLogix 5580 controllers, when used with a safety partner are suitable for
use in SIL 3 safety applications. You can use Compact 5000 I/O safety modules
as remote I/O modules in such an application.

For more information on the suitability level of Logix 5000 safety controllers,
see the GuardLogix 5580 and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller Systems
Safety Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM012.

Single-channel or Dual-channel Mode

You can use Compact 5000 I/O safety modules in single-channel mode or dual-
channel configuration. The configuration affects the safety application
suitability level for a module.

In single-channel mode, the signal status on one channel is evaluated. Based

on that status, safety input data and safety input status can be off or on.

In dual-channel mode, the consistency between the signal status on two

channels are evaluated. Based on the status on both channels, safety input data
and safety input status can be off or on.
You use safety instructions in the safety controller ladder logic with two single
channels, that is, one even and one odd.

We recommend that, if you use dual channel safety instructions, for example,
the Dual Channel Input Stop (DCS) instruction, in the Safety Task, you
configure the channels for single-channel mode.

Use with Safety Controllers

You can only use the Compact GuardLogix 5380 or GuardLogix 5580 controllers
with the Compact 5000 I/O safety modules. Restrictions apply regarding how
the controllers can use the I/O modules. The restrictions are described in
Controller and Software Compatibility on page 16.

For more information on which controllers you can use with Compact 5000
I/O safety modules, see Table 2 on page 17.

You must use the Logix Designer application, version 32 or later, to configure
the Compact 5000 I/O safety modules.

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Determine Conformity

ATTENTION: Use only appropriate components or devices that comply with the
relevant safety standards and meet the required safety integrity level or
Performance Level and safety category.
• Conformity to the requirements of the relevant safety standards must be
determined for the entire system by conducting a risk assessment.
• Use devices properly according to the installation environment, performance
rating, and functions of the machine.
• Use devices within their specified ratings.
• We recommend that you consult a certification body regarding assessment of
conformity to the required safety integrity level or Performance Level.
You are responsible for confirming compliance with the applicable standards
for the entire system. You must read, understand, and fulfill
the functional safety requirements of the standard applicable to your
safety application.

Obtain Firmware
Verify that the firmware revision of the Compact 5000 I/O safety modules that
you use is correct before commissioning the system.

Firmware information for safety I/O devices is available at the Rockwell

Automation Product Compatibility and Download Center (PCDC). The PCDC
is available at:
https://compatibility.rockwellautomation.com/Pages/home.aspx

Only download firmware and access product release notes from the Rockwell
Automation PCDC.

Do not download firmware from non-Rockwell Automation sites.

Safety Function During Firmware Update

The Compact 5000 I/O safety modules are not safety capable when a firmware
update is in process. You must use other methods to maintain the safety
function during the update process.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 57

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Safety Precautions
ATTENTION: Personnel responsible for the application of safety-related
programmable electronic systems (PES) shall be aware of the safety
requirements in the application of the system and shall be trained in the use of
the system.

Observe the following precautions for the proper use Compact 5000 I/O
safety modules.

ATTENTION: As serious injury can occur due to loss of required safety function,
follow the following safety precautions.
• Never use test outputs as safety outputs. Test outputs are not safety outputs.
• Do not use standard I/O data or explicit message data as safety data.
• Do not use light-emitting diode (LED) status indicators on the I/O modules for
safety operations.
• Do not connect loads beyond the rated value to the safety outputs.
• Apply properly specified voltages to the module. Applying inappropriate
voltages can cause the module to fail to perform its specified function, which
could lead to loss of safety functions or damage to the module.
• Wire the Compact 5000 I/O safety modules as shown in the Compact 5000
I/O Modules and EtherNet/IP Adapters Technical Data, publication 5069-TD001.
• Set unique network node addresses before connecting devices to
the network.
• Perform testing to confirm that device wiring, configuration, and operation is
correct before you start system operation.
• Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the module. This can result in loss of
safety functions.

For more information about safety precautions,

see Secure Access to the System on page 25.

Installing and Replacing Modules

ATTENTION:
• Clear previous configuration data before you connect devices to
the network or connecting input or output power to the device.
• Configure the replacement device properly and confirm that it
operates correctly.
• After installation of the module, a safety administrator must confirm the
installation and conduct trial operation and maintenance.

Securing Access to the System

For information on how to secure access to the system, see page 25.

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Safety Application Requirements

Safety application requirements include evaluating the following:
• Probability of failure rates (PFD and PFH)
• System reaction time settings
• Functional verification tests that fulfill appropriate safety-level criteria

Creating, recording, and verifying that the safety signature is also a required
part of the safety application development process. The safety controller
creates the safety signatures. The safety signature consists of an identification
number, date, and time that uniquely identifies the safety portion of a project.
This number includes all safety logic, data, and safety I/O configuration.

For safety system requirements, including information on the SNN,

verifying the safety signature, functional verification test intervals, system
reaction time, and PFD/PFH calculations, see the GuardLogix 5580 and
Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller Systems Safety Reference Manual,
publication 1756-RM012.
You must read, understand, and fulfill the requirements that are described in
this publication before you operate a safety system that uses Compact 5000
I/O safety modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 59

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Safe State
ATTENTION:
• The safe state of the outputs is defined as the off state.
• The safe state of the module and its data is defined as the off state.
• Use the Compact 5000 I/O safety modules only in applications where the off
state is the safe state.

The following are the safe states of the safety modules:

• Safety outputs: OFF
• Safety input data to network: OFF
Figure 9 - Safety Status

Networks Input to Networks OFF

Safety Status

Output OFF Input

The modules are designed for use in applications where the safe state is the
off state.

IMPORTANT If you inhibit a safety module from transitioning to a safe state when a fault
occurs because an I/O connection is lost, you accept responsibility for any
consequences that result from your decision to inhibit.
We recommend that you use other means to maintain the safe state if you
inhibit the safety module from transitioning to a safe state.

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Configuration Signature and Ownership

Every Compact 5000 I/O safety module in a system has a configuration
signature and configuration ownership.

Configuration Signature

Each safety device has a unique configuration signature that defines the
module configuration. The configuration signature includes the following:
• ID number
• Date
• Time

The configuration signature is used to verify a module’s configuration.

Configuration Ownership

The connection between the owner-controller and the Compact 5000 I/O
safety module is based on the following:
• Compact 5000 I/O safety module node number
• Compact 5000 I/O safety module safety network number
• Controller node or slot number

IMPORTANT If the owner-controller is a Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller, the

controller has a node number.
If the owner-controller is a GuardLogix 5580 controller, the controller has
a slot number.
• Controller safety network number
• Path from the controller to the Compact 5000 I/O safety module
• Configuration signature
If any differences are detected, the connection between the owner-controller
and the Compact 5000 I/O safety module is lost, the yellow yield icon appears
in the controller project tree.

Different Configuration Owner

When a controller owns the I/O module configuration, other controllers can
listen to the input module. In this case, the module configuration signature in
the Logix Designer application project for any listening controller must match
the one in the owner-controller project.
If the safety module is configured for inputs only, you can copy and paste the
configuration signature from one project to the other.
If the safety module has safety outputs, for example, the 5069-OBV8S module, the
configuration signature parameter is disabled.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 61

Chapter 1 Digital Module Operation in a Control System

Reset Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules to Out-of-Box State

If a Compact 5000 I/O safety module was used previously, you must clear the
configuration ownership before you can install it on a safety network. That is,
you must return the module configuration to its out-of-box state.

When a Compact 5000 I/O safety module is in the out-of-box state, its
configuration is not owned by a controller.

The Safety category on the Module Properties dialog box displays the module
Configuration Ownership. The Logix Designer application project must be
online to check.
If the module configuration is owned, the Safety category displays whether the
controller for the opened project owns the module configuration or another
controller owns it.

For information on how to reset the module in the Logix Designer application,
see Reset to Out-of-Box Configuration on page 198.

You cannot reset the module to its out-of-box configuration if any of the
following conditions exist:
• There are pending edits to the module properties.
• When a safety signature exists in the controller project.

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 2

Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O

Digital Modules

Topic Page
Input Module Compatibility 64
Output Module Compatibility 65
Software Configurable 66
Module Data Quality Reporting 67
Fault and Status Reporting 68
Module Inhibiting 69
Electronic Keying 70
Module Firmware 71
Producer/Consumer Communication 71
Use CIP Sync Time with Fast I/O Modules 72
Timestamping 72

This chapter describes features that are common to Compact 5000™ I/O digital
modules unless otherwise noted.

Some features are supported on all I/O modules and other features are specific
to module types. The differences are indicated in feature descriptions.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 63

Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Input Module Compatibility Compact 5000 I/O digital input modules interface to sensing devices and
detect whether they are On or Off.
Standard Modules
The input modules convert DC On/Off signals from user devices to
appropriate logic level for use in the controller. Typical input devices include
the following:
• Proximity switches
• Limit switches
• Selector switches
• Float switches
• Push button switches

When you design systems with Compact 5000 I/O digital input modules,
consider the following factors:
• Voltage necessary for your application
• Current leakage
• Whether you need a solid-state device
• Whether your application uses sinking or sourcing wiring
Safety Modules

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Output Module Compatibility Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules can be used to drive output devices.
Typical devices compatible with the following output modules include:
Standard Modules • Motor starters
• Solenoids
• Indicators

When you design systems with Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules,
follow the following guidelines:
• Make sure that the output modules can supply the necessary surge and
continuous current for proper operation.
• Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded.
Damage to the module could result.
When you size output loads, refer to the documentation supplied with the
output device for the surge and continuous current necessary to operate
the device.

Safety Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 65

Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Software Configurable You use the Logix Designer application to configure the module, monitor
system operation, and troubleshoot issues. You can also use the Logix Designer
Standard Modules application to retrieve this information from any module in the system:
• Serial number
• Firmware revision information
• Product code
• Vendor
• Error and fault information
• Diagnostic information

By minimizing the need for tasks, such as setting hardware switches and
jumpers, the software makes module configuration easier and provide
excellent reliability.

Safety Modules

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Module Data The Compact 5000 I/O digital modules indicate the quality of channel data
Quality Reporting that is returned to the owner-controller. Data quality represents accuracy.
Levels of data quality are reported via module input tags.
Standard Modules The following input tags indicate the level of data quality.

IMPORTANT Once the condition that causes the Fault or Uncertain tag to change to 1 is
removed, the tag automatically resets to 0. The Logix Designer application
controls the tags. You cannot change the status of the tags.
Remember that in some system configurations, the tag is not reset
immediately after the condition is removed. The tag typically resets after a
small delay.
• I.Ptxx.Fault - This tag indicates that the reported channel data is
inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in your application. Do not use
the reported channel data for control.
If the tag is set to 1, you cannot trust the data reported. You must
troubleshoot the module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
Example causes of inaccurate data include:
- Field Power Loss condition (output modules)
- No Load condition (standard output modules only)
- Short Circuit condition (output modules)
Safety Modules We recommend that you troubleshoot the module for the typical
causes first.
• I.Ptxx.Uncertain - This tag indicates that the reported channel data can
be inaccurate but the degree of inaccuracy is unknown. We recommend
that you do not use the reported channel data for control.
If the module sets this tag to 1, you know that the data can be inaccurate.
You must troubleshoot the module to discover what degree of
inaccuracy exists.
Example causes of uncertain data include:
- Module is operating outside its designed operating range
- Data is under manual or override control
We strongly recommend that you monitor the tags in your program to
make sure that the application is operating as expected with accurate
channel input data.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 67

Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Fault and Status Reporting The Compact 5000 I/O digital modules report fault and status data along with
channel data. Fault and status data is reported in the following ways:
Standard Modules • Logix Designer application
• Module status indicators
• I/O status indicators

IMPORTANT Do not use the module status indicators or I/O status indicators on
Compact 5000 I/O safety modules for safety operations.

For more information on fault and status reporting, see:

• Input modules - Fault and Status Reporting on page 80
• Output modules - Fault and Status Reporting on page 115
• Appendix A, Troubleshoot Your Module on page 201

Safety Modules

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Module Inhibiting Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection, including Listen
Only connections, between an owner-controller and an I/O module without
Standard Modules removing the module from the configuration. This process lets you
temporarily disable a module, such as to perform maintenance.

IMPORTANT You cannot inhibit a connection when the controller is safety-locked or a

safety signature exists for the controller.

You can use module inhibiting in the following ways:

• You write a configuration for an I/O module but inhibit the module to
help prevent it from communicating with the owner-controller. The
owner does not establish a connection and the configuration is not sent
to the module until the connection is uninhibited.
• In your application, a controller already owns a module, has downloaded
the configuration to the module, and is exchanging data over the
connection between the devices.
In this case, you can inhibit the module and the connection to the module
does not exist.

IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module that is ProgMode enabled, it

enters Program mode, and all outputs change to the state configured
Safety Modules for Program mode.
For example, if an output module is configured so that the state of
the outputs transition to zero during Program mode, whenever that
module is inhibited, outputs transition to zero.

You can use module inhibiting in the following instances:

• You want to update an I/O module, for example, update the module
firmware revision. Use this procedure.
a. Inhibit the module.
b. Perform the update.
c. Uninhibit the module.
• You use a program that includes a module that you do not physically
possess yet. You do not want the controller to look for a module that does
not yet exist. In this case, you can inhibit the module in your program
until it physically resides in the proper slot.

You can inhibit the connection to a Compact 5000 I/O digital module on the
Connection category of the Module Properties dialog box.

To see where to inhibit a connection, see the following:

• Compact 5000 I/O standard modules - page 157
• Compact 5000 I/O safety modules - page 190

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 69

Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Electronic Keying Electronic Keying reduces the possibility that you use the wrong device in a
control system. It compares the device that is defined in your project to the
Standard Modules installed device. If keying fails, a fault occurs. These attributes are compared.
Attribute Description
Vendor The device manufacturer.
Device Type The general type of the product, for example, digital I/O module.
Product Code The specific type of the product. The Product Code maps to a catalog number.
Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities of a device.
Minor Revision A number that represents behavior changes in the device.

The following Electronic Keying options are available.

Keying Option Description
Lets the installed device accept the key of the device that is defined in the project when the
installed device can emulate the defined device. With Compatible Module, you can typically replace
a device with another device that has the following characteristics:
Compatible Module •• Same catalog number
Same or higher Major Revision
• Minor Revision as follows:
– If the Major Revision is the same, the Minor Revision must be the same or higher.
– If the Major Revision is higher, the Minor Revision can be any number.
Indicates that the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with a
Safety Modules device. With Disable Keying, communication can occur with a device other than the type specified
in the project.
ATTENTION: Be extremely cautious when using Disable Keying; if used incorrectly, this option can
Disable Keying lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
We strongly recommend that you do not use Disable Keying.
If you use Disable Keying, you must take full responsibility for understanding whether the device
being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the application.
IMPORTANT: Do not use this option in Safety applications.
Indicates that all keying attributes must match to establish communication. If any attribute does
Exact Match not match precisely, communication with the device does not occur.

Carefully consider the implications of each keying option when selecting one.

IMPORTANT Changing Electronic Keying parameters online interrupts connections to the

device and any devices that are connected through the device. Connections
from other controllers can also be broken.
If an I/O connection to a device is interrupted, the result can be a loss
of data.

More Information
For more detailed information on Electronic Keying, see Electronic Keying in
Logix 5000 Control Systems Application Technique, publication
LOGIX-AT001.

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Module Firmware The Compact 5000 I/O digital modules are manufactured with module
firmware installed. If updated module firmware revisions are available in the
Standard Modules future, you can update the firmware.

Updated firmware revisions are made available for various reasons,

for example, to correct an anomaly that existed in previous module
firmware revisions.

IMPORTANT Verify that the module firmware revisions for the Compact 5000 I/O safety
modules that you use are correct before commissioning your system.

You access updated firmware files at the Rockwell Automation® Product

Compatibility and Download Center (PCDC). The PCDC is available at:
https://compatibility.rockwellautomation.com/Pages/home.aspx
Only download firmware and access product release notes from the Rockwell
Automation PCDC.

Do not download firmware from non-Rockwell Automation sites.

Safety Modules

Producer/Consumer Compact 5000 I/O digital modules use the Producer/Consumer

Communication communication model to produce data without a controller polling them first.
The modules produce the data and controllers consume it. That is, the owner-
Standard Modules controller and controllers with a Listen Only connection to the module can
consume it.

When an input module produces data, the controllers can consume the data
simultaneously. Simultaneous data consumption minimizes the need for one
controller to send the data to other controllers.

Safety Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 71

Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Use CIP Sync Time with Fast The following Compact 5000 I/O standard modules use CIP Sync™ for time
I/O Modules stamps and scheduling:
• 5069-IB16F
Standard Modules • 5069-IB6F-3W
• 5069-OB16F

CIP Sync is a CIP implementation of the IEEE 1588 PTP (Precision Time
Protocol). CIP Sync provides accurate real-time (Real-World Time) or
Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) synchronization of controllers and devices
that are connected over CIP networks. This technology supports highly
distributed applications that require timestamping, sequence of events
recording, distributed motion control, and increased control coordination.

The 5069-IB16F, 5069-IB6F-3W, and 5069-OB16F modules are CIP Sync slave-
only devices. There must be another module on the network that functions as a
master clock. For more information on how to use CIP Sync technology, see
the Integrated Architecture® System and CIP Sync Configuration Application
Technique, publication IA-AT003.

You can use fast Compact 5000 I/O digital modules to capture time stamps and
schedule outputs while providing the following advances:
• Fast I/O modules have much higher precision than other modules.
• Inputs are timestamped by point, so multiple inputs can be configured
for COS without losing time stamp data.
• CIP Sync is system-wide, so time stamp and schedule values are
consistent across all modules in the system.
For example, if you use time stamps on a 5069-IB16F module to schedule
outputs on a 5069-OB16F module, the controller, input module, and
output module are not required to reside in the same local system. The I/
O modules can reside in a remote I/O system.
• Output modules use all 64 bits of the time stamp to schedule, so there are
no limits on schedule ranges.

Timestamping The control system uses a 64-bit system clock. The modules support CIP Sync
timestamping by using the 1588 protocol that is passed throughout the system.
Standard Modules The 1588 protocol is defined in the IEEE 1588-2002 standard, publication
Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked
Measurement and Control Systems.

IMPORTANT Compact 5000 I/O safety modules do not support timestamping.

Each input channel scan or new output application is stamped with a CIP Sync
time stamp. One time stamp is returned to the controller for the module with
the input data transfer.

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

You can use this feature for the following:

• To identify the sequence of events in fault conditions or during
normal operation.
You can use the system clock between multiple modules in the same
chassis or throughout a system in which a common Time Master
is used.
• To measure the change between samples and detect when a new sample
is available for processing via the logic. The change between sample likely
correlates closely with the RPI if no samples are missed in the logic.
You can also use the 1588 Protocol to synchronize sampling for modules across
the entire system. By using the Synchronized Sampling feature, you can
configure multiple modules to coordinate their input samples precisely with
each other by using the same RPI.

Synchronized Sampling lets you configure a test stand, for example, and take
many measurements simultaneously across many modules, if needed, while
still precisely coordinating the sampling. With these modules, the
synchronized sampling coordinates within approximately ± 10 μs.

Table 12 describes how you can use time stamps.

Table 12 - Time Stamp Options
Topic Description
You can use CIP Sync to establish a sequence of events occurring at a particular input
module point by timestamping the input data. To determine a sequence of events, you must
complete the following:
• Set the format of the input module to Timestamped Input Data.
• Enable COS for the input where a sequence occurs, and disable COS for all other points on the
Timestamping for a module.
sequence of events
If you configure multiple inputs for COS, your module generates a unique time
stamp each time any of those inputs change state if the changes do not occur
within 500 µs of each other.
If multiple inputs that are configured for COS change state within 500 ìs of
each other, one time stamp is generated for all state changes. As a result, it
appears as if they changed simultaneously.
You can use timestamping with the scheduled outputs feature, so that after input data
changes state and a time stamp occurs, an output point actuates at a specific time.
You can schedule outputs into the future. Outputs that are sent in one packet can differ by
approximately 2 seconds. Sending in multiple messages allows greater spacing between
schedules. When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs, you must complete
the following:
Timestamping with • Choose a connection format for each input and output module that enables timestamping.
scheduled outputs • Disable COS for all input points on the input module except the point being timestamped.
For scheduled outputs to work most effectively, remember the following:
• The schedule fires when it is configured to. You must make sure that there is
enough time for the schedule to plan ahead. If you are using an MAOC
instruction, you cannot control the schedule.
• A system-level Grandmaster synchronizes the times of the I/O modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 73

Chapter 2 Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules

Notes:

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3

Input Module Features

Topic Page
Multiple Input Module Types 76
Data Transfer at RPI or Change of State 76
Software Configurable Input Filters and Delays 77
Module Health Diagnostic 80
Fault and Status Reporting 80
Simple Count Mode 83
Sequence of Events Per Point Timestamping 84
Chatter Detection 85
Events 86
Pulse Latching 90
Field Power Loss Detection 92
Short Circuit Protection 93
Thermal Shutoff 95

This chapter describes features that are supported on Compact 5000™ I/O
digital input modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 75

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Multiple Input Module Types The Compact 5000 I/O digital module family offers the following input
module types:
Standard Modules
• AC standard input module - 5069-IA16
• DC standard input module - 5069-IB16
• DC standard input conformal coated module - 5069-IB16K
• DC standard fast input modules - 5069-IB16F, 5069-IB6F-3W
• DC safety input modules - 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK

Safety Modules

Data Transfer at RPI or Compact 5000 I/O digital input modules always send data at the RPI, but they
Change of State send data at a change of state only if the COS feature is enabled.

Standard Modules The following table describes the two ways a module sends data to the
owner-controller.
Method Description
A user-defined rate at which the module updates the information that is sent to its
RPI owner-controller.
Configurable feature that, when enabled, instructs the module to update its owner-
controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and
COS Off to On. The data is sent at the RPI rate when there is no change of state. By default, this
setting is always enabled for input modules.

You set the RPI on the Connection page of the Module Properties dialog box in
the Logix Designer application.

Safety Modules

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Software Configurable Input You can increase the time that it takes for an input point to transition from On
Filters and Delays to Off and Off to On for Compact 5000 I/O digital input modules. The increase
in time is a delay of the signal from the module to the controller.
Standard Modules
The increase in the time to transition from one state to another improves noise
immunity within a signal.

Compact 5000 I/O Standard Input Modules

For Compact 5000 I/O standard input modules, the configurable parameter is
Input Filter Time. This table describes how to use this feature with most of the
standard input modules.
Module Valid Filter Value Range Default Value
5069-IB16, 5069-IB16K 1 ms
5069-IB6F-3W 0 µ…50 ms
0 µs
5069-IB16F

The input signal that is connected to the 5069-IA16 input module dictates the
valid input filter values that you can use.
Input Signal Value Filter Time: Off to On - Valid Values Filter Time: On to Off - Valid Values
Safety Modules
• 10 ms
120V AC • 1 ms
• 20 ms
• 1 ms • 5 ms
240V AC • 2 ms • 10 ms
• 5 ms • 20 ms

IMPORTANT Logix Designer application lets you choose filter time values that are invalid for
some input signals.
For example, the only valid Off to On filter value when a 120V AC signal is
connected to the module is 1 ms. However, you can choose 1 ms, 2 ms, or 5 ms.
Make sure that you select a valid input filter value when you configure the
module. If you select an invalid input filter value, the module can read signal
levels incorrectly.

To see where to set the input filter values, see the following:
• 5069-IA16 module - page 159
• 5069-IB16 and 5069-IB16K module - page 161
• 5069-IB16F module - page 163
• 5069-IB6F-3W module - page 169

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 77

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Modules

For Compact 5000 I/O safety input modules, the configurable parameter is
Input Delay Time. This table describes how to use this feature with the safety
input modules.
Modules Valid Filter Value Range Default Value
5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK 0 ms…50 ms 0 ms

To see where to set the Input Delay Time on the 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK
modules, see page 193. For more information on how to use the Input Delay
Time feature on a 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module, see Safety Input Delay
Time on page 130.

Input Filter with Compact 5000 I/O Fast Input Modules

IMPORTANT • This description applies to 5069-IB16F and 5069-IB6F-3W modules, and

to any 5069-IB16 module that uses firmware revision 2.011 and earlier.
• The input filters work the same whether the transition is a simple state
transition or when the state transition triggers an Event.
On the Compact 5000 I/O fast input modules, the input filter not only helps to
improve noise immunity in a signal but also to help prevent rapid changes of
the input data due to contact bounce.

The input filter time defines how long an input signal transition must remain
in the new state before the transition is valid and the input changes state.
Input and Event time stamps are only recorded with valid transitions.
A transition is only valid if the input signal remains in the new state for the
entirety of the filter duration. If the input changes state again before the
chosen input filter time elapses, the transition is not valid.

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

In Figure 10, the first three signal transitions--both On to Off and Off to On--
remain the same state until the filter time elapses and are not valid.
Figure 10 - Input Filter Usage on Compact 5000 I/O Fast Input Modules

ON
Input Signal
OFF
State Change
End
Off to On Filter Filter Duration

Start

ON
Module Input Data
OFF

Off to On Filter Timestamp Value

ON
Input Signal
OFF

State Change
End
On to Off Filter Filter Duration

Start

ON
Module Input Data
OFF

ON to Off Filter Timestamp Value

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 79

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Module Health Diagnostic Every Compact 5000 I/O digital module has a status indicator on the front of
Standard Modules
the module that indicates module health.

For more information on status indicators, see Appendix A, Troubleshoot Your

Module on page 201.

Safety Modules

Fault and Status Reporting The input modules multicast fault and status data with channel data to the
Standard Modules owner and listening controllers. The data is returned via module tags that you
can monitor in your Logix Designer application.

With some exceptions, the Compact 5000 I/O digital input modules provide
the fault and data status in a point-centric format. The tag names that
include Ptxx represent point-centric data in the table. The xx represents
the point number.

Not all tags that are listed in Table 13 apply to all Compact 5000 I/O digital
input modules. For example, the 5069-IB16F module uses the Eventx.PtxxData
tag. The 5069-IB16 or 5069-IB16K modules do not use it.

Safety Modules

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Compact 5000 I/O Standard Input Modules

Table 13 lists tags that are used on Compact 5000 I/O standard input modules.

IMPORTANT For more information on the valid values for each tag, see Appendix B,
Module Tag Definitions on page 219.

Table 13 - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Input Module - Fault and Data Status
Data Type Tag Name(1) Triggering Event That Sets
(2) The owner-controller loses its connection to the module.
ConnectionFaulted
Counterxx.Fault The counter data quality is bad.
Ptxx.Fault The point data quality is bad.
Fault
Eventx.CounterxxFault The corresponding counter had a fault that indicated when the event occurred.
Eventx.Fault The signal connection is lost.
Eventx.Ptxx.Fault The event data quality is bad.
RunMode The module is in Run Mode.
DiagnosticActive Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached.
DiagnosticSequenceCount The count increments each time that a diagnostic condition is detected or removed.
Counterxx.Data The point input status is 0 or 1.
Counterxx.Uncertain The counter data can be imperfect.
Status
Eventx.PtxxData The point input status is 0 or 1.
Eventx.Uncertain The event data can be imperfect.
Ptxx.Data The point input status is 0 or 1.
Ptxx.Uncertain The point data can be imperfect.
Uncertain(2) The module is operating outside its designed operating range if data is under manual or override control.
(1) Not all tag names apply to all Compact 5000 I/O standard input modules. For example, only modules that support the Events feature use the Event tags but modules.
(2) This tag provides module-wide data and affects all channels simultaneously.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 81

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module

Table 14 lists tags that are used on Compact 5000 I/O safety input module.

IMPORTANT For more information on the valid values for each tag, see Appendix B,
Module Tag Definitions on page 219.

Table 14 - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module - Fault and Data Status
Data Type Tag Name Triggering Event That Sets
(1) The owner-controller loses its connection to the module.
ConnectionFaulted
Ptxx.Fault The point data quality is bad or the channel is set to Not Used.
Ptxx.ShortCircuit A short circuit condition exists on the point.
Fault
Testxx.Fault The point data quality is bad or the channel is set to Not Used.
Testxx.ShortCircuit A short circuit condition exists on the test point.
Testxx.FieldPowerOff A field power lost condition exists on the test point.
RunMode The module is in Run Mode.
DiagnosticActive Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached.
DiagnosticSequenceCount The count increments each time that a diagnostic condition is detected or removed.
Ptxx.Data The data currently at the point.
Status Ptxx.Uncertain The point data can be imperfect because an Over temperature or Critical Temperature condition exists.
Ptxx.Status The point state transitions from normal to faulted or faulted to normal.
Testxx.Readback A 24V DC power is present at the test output.
Testxx.Uncertain The test point data can be imperfect.
Testxx.Status The test point state transitions from normal to faulted or faulted to normal.
(1) This tag provides module-wide data an affects all channels simultaneously.

For more information on fault reporting, see Appendix A, Troubleshoot Your

Module on page 201.

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Simple Count Mode Simple count mode is used to count input pulses.
Standard Modules
IMPORTANT The following Compact 5000 I/O standard input modules support Simple Count
mode:
• 5069-IB16
• 5069-IB16F
• 5069-IB16K
• 5069-IB6F-3W

When using the simple counter function, the module counts input pulses up to
the following frequencies:
• The simple counter maximum frequency for the 5069-IB16 and
5069-IB16K modules is 500 Hz (inv. period 2 ms).
The maximum number of counters on the 5069-IB16 and 5069-IB16K
modules is 8. You can configure channels 0…7 to be counters.
• The simple counter maximum frequency for the 5069-IB16F and
5069-IB6F-3W modules is: 30 kHz (inv. period 33.3 μs).
- The maximum number of counters on the 5069-IB16F module is 8. You
can configure channels 0…7 to be counters.
- The maximum number of counters on the 5069-IB6F-3W module is 4.
You can configure channels 0…3 to be counters.

The modules compare total count to previously programmed values and then
can activate an associated output. The modules provide for count up
functionality and counter overflow.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 83

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Sequence of Events Per Timestamping registers a time reference to a change in input data. CIP Sync is
Point Timestamping used for timestamping.

Standard Modules IMPORTANT The following Compact 5000 I/O standard input modules support Per Point
Timestamping:
• 5069-IB16F
• 5069-IB6F-3W

The 5069-IB16F and 5069-IB6F-3W DC input modules offer submillisecond

timestamping on a per point basis. Time stamp values have ±10 μs accuracy
and ±1 ns resolution.

You can use CIP Sync to establish a sequence of events occurring at an input
module point by timestamping the input data. To determine a sequence of
events, you must perform the following:
• On the Module Definition dialog box in the Logix Designer application
project, set the Input Data parameter to Timestamp Data.
• Enable COS for the input point where a sequence occurs, and disable
COS for all other points on the module.
You can enable COS in the following ways.
Location in Logix Designer Application Action
Check the input transition type where you need to latch
short duration pulses.
Module Properties dialog box > Points category >
For example, if you need to latch short duration pulses
Ptxx subcategory for Off to On transitions, check Off -> On Input
Transition.
One or both of the following:
Module tags • Change the C.Ptxx.CaptureOffOnEn tag to 1.
• Change the C.Ptxx.CaptureOnOffEn tag to 1.

For more information on Timestamping, see page 72.

To see where to set the Timestamping options, see the following:
• 5069-IB16F module - page 164
• 5069-IB6F-3W module - page 170

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Chatter Detection Chatter Detection is a feature that is directly related to Timestamping. You
Standard Modules use the feature to detect when a device that is connected to an input module
causes chatter.

Chatter occurs when the device causes the inputs to transition falsely many
times in a relatively short period. As a result, the module timestamps invalid
input transitions.

You can configure the following:

• Chatter count - Determines the number of acceptable input transitions
that can occur in a given time period before considering the input to be
chatter.
Valid chatter count values range from 2…127.
• Chatter Time - Determines the amount of time within which the number
of input transitions are counted.
Valid chatter time values range from 1…10000 ms.

To see where to set the Chatter Detection options, see the following:
• 5069-IB16F module - page 164
• 5069-IB6F-3W module - page 170

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 85

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Events You can use the Events feature to trigger events.

Standard Modules IMPORTANT The following Compact 5000 I/O standard input modules support the Events
feature:
• 5069-IB16F
• 5069-IB6F-3W

The modules support up to four event configurations.

The following can trigger events:

• An input state change.
• A counting input done bit change.
• A pattern of input state changes on multiple module inputs.

You must use the Data with Events connection type in the Module Definition
to use the Events feature.

Event Definition
You define an event. When you define an event, remember the following:
• The event definition parameters are shown on Eventsxx category in the
Module Properties dialog box. The parameters are read-only in the dialog
box as shown in this example.

IMPORTANT: You cannot

change the parameters on
this dialog box.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

• The event definition parameters are configured in the Event Output s as

shown in this example.

Table 15 describes the tasks that are included in defining an event.

Table 15 - Event Definition
Task Event Output Tag to Change Valid Values
• 0 = Event is disabled.
Enable the event. EO.Eventxx.En
• 1 = Event is enabled.
Choose if an input state change or a pattern of input state • 0 = Pattern of input state changes triggers the event.
EO.Eventxx.IndependentConditionTriggerEn
changes triggers the event. • 1 = Single input state change triggers the event.
The tag name changes based on the input function. The
following names are available:
Select at least one point on the module to participate in the • EO.Eventxx.PtxxDataSelect - This tag appears for any • 0 = Point does not participate in the event trigger.
point on the module if no counters are used.
event. • 1 = Point participates in the event trigger.
• EO.Eventxx.CounterxxSelect - These tags begin at point00
and continue based on the number of counters that the
module uses.
The tag name changes based on the input function. The
following names are available:
• EO.Eventxx.PtxxDataValue - This tag appears for any • 0 = On to Off state transition
For all points that participate in the event, choose what point on the module if no counters are used.
constitutes an event state. • 1 = Off to On state transition
• EO.Eventxx.CounterxxValue - The tags begin at point00
and continue based on the number of counters that the
module uses.
The combination of the tag settings determines which
edge triggers the event:
• Rising edge triggers the event set by
this combination:
– EO.Eventxx.EventRisingEn = 1
Both of the following: – EO.Eventxx.EventFallingEn = 0
Choose which edge of the event triggers the event. That is, if • EO.Eventxx.EventRisingEn • Falling edge triggers the event set by
the rising edge, falling edge, or either edge of the event. this combination:
• EO.Eventxx.EventFallingEn – EO.Eventxx.EventRisingEn = 0
– EO.Eventxx.EventFallingEn = 1
• Falling edge triggers the event set by
this combination:
– EO.Eventxx.EventRisingEn = 1
– EO.Eventxx.EventFallingEn = 1
• 0 = Event is not latched.
Latch the event. This task is optional. EO.Eventxx.LatchEn
• 1 = Event is latched.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 87

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Independent Point Trigger

An input state change triggering an event is known as an independent
point trigger.

To use this type of trigger, you must enable the Independent Point Trigger
option in the event definition. You set the
EO.Eventxx.IndependentConditionTriggerEn tag to 1.

Pattern Match Trigger

When a pattern of input state changes triggers an event, multiple points
participate in the event trigger. To use this type of trigger, you must disable the
Independent Point Trigger option in the event definition. You set the
EO.Eventxx.IndependentConditionTriggerEn tag to 0.

Every point that participates in an event trigger is configured separately.

Depending on the event definition, the collective status of all points triggers
the event. The table describes event triggers.
Trigger Definition
If the event is defined to trigger on the rising edge, the event is triggered when a state
Enter pattern match state change on any participating point results in all point configuration conditions being met.
In the event definition dialog box, Trigger Event = On input transition to match pattern.
If the event is defined to trigger on the falling edge, the event is triggered when a state
Leave pattern match state change on any participating point results in all point configuration conditions no longer
being met.
In the event definition dialog box, Trigger Event = On input transition to not match pattern.
If the event is defined to trigger on the rising or falling edge, the event is triggered when a
Enter or leave pattern match state change on any participating point results in all point configuration conditions being
state met or no longer being met.
In the event definition dialog box, Trigger Event = On input transition to not match pattern.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Additional Event Considerations

When you use the Events feature, also consider the following:
• An Event task only actuates if an event occurs.

IMPORTANT Make sure that you link the Event task to the Event Input tag,
not the Input tag.
Keep in mind that when the Event task executes, the input
tag data can have the same data that was sent at the
last RPI.
• An event is recognized only when it maintains the same state for at least
the duration of the input filter time specified.
• Configure the event at a rate that stops task overlap conditions. If you
enable COS for multiple points, a task overlap of the event can occur.
• Configure the event at a rate that is likely to succeed. A 2 ms signal width
is the minimum pulse width that can be used at which the
event succeeds.
• After the event executes, it does not execute again until the event
occurs again.
• For more information on event tasks, see the Logix 5000™
Controllers Tasks, Programs, and Routines Programming Manual,
publication 1756-PM005.

To see how to configure the Events feature, see the following:

• 5069-IB16F module - page 165
• 5069-IB6F-3W module - page 171

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 89

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Pulse Latching You can use Pulse Latching to detect or latch short duration pulses. The
module can detect incoming pulses with a duration as short as 10 μs if the
Standard Modules frequency is under 4 kHz (period of 250 μs).

IMPORTANT The following Compact 5000 I/O standard input modules support
Pulse Latching:
• 5069-IB16F
• 5069-IB6F-3W

Pulse Latching is supported via the Timestamping feature and Timestamp

Latching.

To use Pulse Latching, you must complete the following:

• On the Module Definition dialog box in the Logix Designer application
project, set the Input Data parameter to Timestamp Data.
• Enable COS for the input point where a latch of short duration pulses is
needed. You can enable COS in the following ways.
Location in Logix Designer Application Action
Check the input transition type where you need to latch
short duration pulses.
Module Properties dialog box > Points category > For example, if you need short duration pulses latched
Ptxx subcategory for Off to On transitions, check Off -> On Input
Transition.
One or both of the following:
Module tags • Change the C.Ptxx.CaptureOffOnEn tag to 1.
• Change the C.Ptxx.CaptureOnOffEn tag to 1.

COS is disabled by default on all points.

When the module detects a short duration pulse at an input point, the changes
that are described in this table occur.
Input Transition Type Change in Logix Designer Application Project
Where Pulse Is Captured
• The I.Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumber tag increments.
Off to On
• The time stamp is recorded in I.Ptxx.TimestampOffOn tag.
• The I.Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumber tag increments.
On to Off
• The time stamp is recorded in I.Ptxx.TimestampOnOff tag.

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

When subsequent short duration pulses are detected at the same input point,
the Latching configuration dictates what changes, if any, occur in the Logix
Designer application project.
Input Transition Type Where Change in Logix Designer Application Project
Latching Configuration Pulse Is Captured
The I.Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumber tag increments.
Disabled (default) Off to On The new time stamp is recorded in the I.Ptxx.TimestampOffOn tag, overwriting the
The following conditions disable Timestamp Latching: previous time stamp.
• Enable Timestamp Latching field on the Module Properties
dialog box is clear The I.Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumber tag increments.
• C.Ptxx.TimestampLatchEn tag = 0. On to Off The new time stamp is recorded in the I.Ptxx.TimestampOnOff tag, overwriting the
previous time stamp.
The I.Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumber and I.Ptxx.TimestampOffOn tags remain latched
until the last captured pulse is acknowledged.
Enabled Off to On In other words, the tag values remain the same until the last captured pulse is
The following conditions enable Timestamp Latching: acknowledged.
• Enable Timestamp Latching field on the Module Properties
dialog box is checked. The I.Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumber and I.Ptxx.TimestampOnOff tags remain latched
• C.Ptxx.TimestampLatchEn tag = 1. until the last captured pulse is acknowledged.
On to Off In other words, the tag values remain the same until the last captured pulse is
acknowledged.

To acknowledge the last captured pulse, set the output tag of the last input
pulse as follows:
• Off to On transition - Set the O.Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumberAck tag =
I.Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumber tag.
• On to Off transition - Set the O.Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumberAck tag =
I.Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumber tag.

Once a pulse latch is acknowledged for an input point, the next pulse at that
point increments the corresponding I.Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumber and
records the time stamp in I.Ptxx.TimestampOffOn.

You can change tag values in program logic while normal module operation
continues or through the Logix Designer application tag editor. For more
information about module tags, see Appendix B, Module Tag Definitions on
page 219.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 91

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Field Power Loss Detection The Field Power Loss Detection feature monitors for the loss of field-side
Safety Modules power on an SA power bus.

IMPORTANT The 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK are the only Compact 5000 I/O input modules
that support Field Power Loss Detection.

When power is lost from an SA power bus, the Compact 5000 I/O safety input
modules detect the loss of field power and fault. Fault data is then sent to the
controller. All points on the module fault when field power is lost.

Table 16 describes what happens when a field power loss condition is detected.
Table 16 - Field Power Loss Detection - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module
Test Output I/O Status SA Status
Tag Value Diagnostic Value
Behavior Indicator State Indicator
• Faults • I.Testxx.FieldPowerOff tag = 1
FieldPowerOff diagnostic = 1 Steady red Off
• Turns off • I.Testxx.Fault tag = 1

To correct the issue, you must reapply field power to the test output.

Table 17 describes what happens when a field power is restored and the error
latch time, if set, has expired.
Table 17 - Field Power Loss Detection - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module
Test Output I/O Status SA Status
Tag Value Diagnostic Value
Behavior Indicator State Indicator
Restarts in its • I.Testxx.FieldPowerOff
commanded tag = 0 FieldPowerOff diagnostic = 0 Off Steady green
state. • I.Testxx.Fault tag = 0

IMPORTANT The module can require up to 1 second to complete the recovery in addition to
the Input Error Latch Time.

Field Power Loss Detection has a corresponding tag that can be examined in
the user program if a fault occurs. For information on modules, see Appendix
B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219.
You can also monitor a point for the presence of a field power loss via the
diagnostics that are available in the Module Properties dialog box in Logix
Designer application.

IMPORTANT Keep in mind the following:

• Field Power Loss detection is specific to the SA power bus.
• You can use 5069-FPD field potential distributors to establish new SA
power buses that are separate from the one that the controller or
EtherNet/IP™ adapter establishes.
• If separate external power supplies are used for each SA power bus, the
loss of field power from one SA power bus does not affect modules that
draw power from other SA power buses.

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Short Circuit Protection Short Circuit Protection helps prevent damage to a test output on a 5069-IB8S
Safety Modules or 5069-IB8SK module that can result when more current is present at the
output than it can handle.

IMPORTANT The 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK are the only Compact 5000 I/O input
modules that support Short Circuit Protection.

The diagnostic is supported on all module outputs, that is, the Test Output
points and the Test Output/Muting Output points.

Table 18 describes what happens when a short circuit condition is detected.

Table 18 - Short Circuit Protection - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module
I/O Status Indicator
Test Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
• Faults I.Testxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1 Short Circuit diagnostic = 1 Flashing red
• Turns off I.Testxx.Fault tag = 1

To correct the issue, remove the short.

Table 19 describes what happens when the short circuit condition is corrected.
Table 19 - Short Circuit Protection - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module
I/O Status Indicator
Test Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
Turns off if there is no
Restarts in its I.Testxx.ShortCircuit tag = 0 Short Circuit diagnostic = 0 longer a load that is
commanded state. I.Testxx.Fault tag = 0 connected to the output.

For more information on the maximum current that you can apply to an
output, see the Compact 5000 I/O Modules and EtherNet/IP Adapters
Technical Data, publication 5069-TD001.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 93

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Muting Lamp Fault and Short Circuit Diagnostics Triggered

The conditions that are described in this section can trigger the Muting Lamp
Fault and Short Circuit diagnostic on a 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module test
output point.

Table 20 describes conditions within which the muting lamp fault and short
circuit diagnostics are triggered.
Table 20 - Short Circuit Protection - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module
Conditions Test Output Behavior Tag(1) and Diagnositic(1) Value I/O Status Indicator State
• Muting Lamp Points in Module Definition - Point 02, Point 03, or Point • I.Testxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1
02 and 03
• Faults • I.Testxx.Fault tag = 1
• Test Output Point Mode - Muting Lamp Flashing red
• Turns off • Muting Lamp Fault diagnostic = 1
• Test Output Data tag = 1
• Short Circuit diagnostic = 1
• Test output point is shorted to 24V DC
• Muting Lamp Points in Module Definition - Point 02, Point 03, or Point
02 and 03 • I.Testxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1
• Test Output Point Mode - Muting Lamp • Faults(2) • I.Testxx.Fault tag = 1
Flashing red
• Test Output Data tag = 1 • Turns off • Muting Lamp Fault diagnostic = 1
• Test output point is shorted to another test output point • Short Circuit diagnostic = 1
• Muting Lamp Points in Module Definition - Point 02, Point 03, or Point • I.Testxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1
02 and 03
• Faults • I.Testxx.Fault tag = 1
• Test Output Point Mode - Muting Lamp Flashing red
• Turns off • Short Circuit diagnostic = 1
• Test Output Data tag = 1
• Short Circuit to Ground diagnostic = 1
• Test output point is shorted to ground
(1) The diagnostics on the fault test output point are triggered in succession. That is, the Muting Lamp Fault diagnostic changes to 1 and then the Short Circuit diagnostic is triggered.
(2) This behavior occurs only on the test output point that is faulted.

When the conditions that trigger the diagnostics as described in Table 20 are
corrected, the results are the same as described in Table 19 on page 93.

Test Output Recovery After Overload or Short Circuit to

Ground Condition
Table 21 describes test output recovery after overload or short circuit to ground
conditions occur.
Table 21 - Test Output Recovery - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Modules
Cause of Fault Module Operating Conditions Correction Recovery Time
• Test Output Point Mode - Pulse Test, Power
Supply, or Muting Lamp.
Overload Condition Remove the load from the test output point.
• Test Output Data tag = 1.
After the condition is corrected, and the test
• Overload current ≥ 0.7 A. output is returned to the safe state, it recovers in
One of the following: whichever of the following times are higher:
• If the Point Mode for the test output is Pulse • 10 seconds
Test or Power Supply when the Short Circuit • Input Error Latch Time - This time is set on the
• Test Output Point Mode - Pulse Test, Power condition is detected, the condition can be Input Points category of the Module Properties
Short Circuit to Ground Supply, or Muting Lamp. corrected but you cannot set the test output dialog box.
Condition • Test Output Data tag = 1. to a safe state. To see where to set the Input Error Latch Time,
• Test output is connected directly to ground. • If the Point Mode for the test output is Muting go to page 193.
Lamp and the output is on when the Short
Circuit condition is detected, the ShortToHigh
is detected as a muting fault.

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Thermal Shutoff Thermal Shutoff helps prevent damage to a test output on the 5069-IB8S
Safety Modules or 5069-IB8SK module that can result when an output gets hotter than it
can handle.

IMPORTANT The 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK are the only Compact 5000 I/O input modules
that support Thermal Shutoff.

This feature is directly related to Short Circuit Protection feature. The

increased temperature at the output results from an excessive load at the
output. That is, a load with high current is applied to the output. The high
current heats the output beyond an acceptable temperature and the output
turns off.

Table 22 describes what happens when a thermal shutoff condition is detected.

Table 22 - Thermal Shutoff - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module
I/O Status Indicator
Test Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
• Faults
I.Testxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1 Short Circuit diagnostic = 1 Steady red
• Turns off

Table 23 describes what happens when the thermal shutoff condition is

corrected.
Table 23 - Thermal Shutoff - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module
I/O Status Indicator
Test Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
One of the following:
Goes in its • If the output point is shorted
commanded state. to 24V DC, the Overload Turns off if there is no
IMPORTANT: The I.Testxx.ShortCircuit tag = 0 diagnostic = 0. longer a load that is
commanded state must • If the output point is shorted connected to the output.
be the Off state. to ground, the Short Circuit
diagnostic = 0.

For more information on how to use the modules, see Appendix B, Module Tag
Definitions on page 219.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 95

Chapter 3 Input Module Features

Notes:

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4

Output Module Features

Topic Page
Multiple Output Module Types 98
Module Health Diagnostics 98
Data Echo 99
Field Power Loss Detection 100
No Load Detection 102
Short Circuit Protection 106
Thermal Shutoff 113
Fault and Status Reporting 115
Output State Change Time 116
Configurable Channel-level Output State in Program Mode or Fault Mode 117
Connection Fault Handling 117
Forcing 119
Time-scheduled Output Control 122
Isolated and Non-isolated Varieties of Output Modules 124

This chapter describes features that are supported on Compact 5000™ I/O
digital output modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 97

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Multiple Output The Compact 5000 I/O digital module family offers the following output
Module Types module types:
• AC standard output module - 5069-OA16
Standard Modules • DC standard output modules - 5069-OB8, 5069-OB16
• DC standard output conformal coated module - 5069-OB16K
• DC standard fast output module - 5069--OB16F
• Standard relay output modules - 5069-OW4I, 5069-OW16, 5069-OX4I
• Safety output modules - 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK

Safety Modules

Module Health Diagnostics Each output module has a status indicator on the front of the module that
Standard Modules indicates module health. For more information on module health diagnostics,
see Appendix A, Troubleshoot Your Module on page 201.

Safety Modules

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Data Echo Data Echo automatically multicasts point data values that match the digital
value that was sent to the screw terminals of the module then.
Standard Modules
A Compact 5000 I/O digital output module returns a value that was sent to it
by the owner-controller. The echoed value is either On or Off.

Fault and status data are also sent. This data is sent at the RPI.

Safety Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 99

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Field Power Loss Detection The Field Power Loss Detection feature monitors for the loss of field power,
either from the SA power bus or, for some modules, from the LA
Standard Modules power terminals.

IMPORTANT The following output module support Field Power Loss detection and receive
field power from the SA power bus:
• 5069-OA16
• 5069-OW16
The following output modules that support Field Power Loss detection and
receive field power from LA power terminals:
• 5069-OB8
• 5069-OB16/B
• 5069-OB16F/B
• 5069-OB16K/B
• 5069-OBV8S
• 5069-OBV8SK
These modules do not draw current from the SA power bus.

When field power is lost, Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules detect the
loss of field power and fault. Fault data is then sent to the controller.

All points on the module fault when field power is lost.

Safety Modules Table 24 describes what happens when a field power loss condition is detected.
Table 24 - Field Power Loss Detection Condition Detected - Compact 5000 I/O Digital Output Modules
SA Status
Output I/O Status
Cat. Nos. Tag Value Diagnostic Value Indicator
Behavior Indicator State State
5069-OA16,
5069-OB8,
5069-OB16/B, I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1 Flashing Red —
5069-OB16F/B,
5069-OB16K/B, • Faults FieldPowerOff
5069-OW16 • Turns off diagnostic = 1
• I.Ptxx.FieldPowerOff
5069-OBV8S, tag = 1
5069-OBV8SK Steady red Off
• I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1

To correct the issue, you must reapply field power to the output module.

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Table 25 describes what happens when a field power loss condition is resolved,
the error latch time, if set, has expired, and the module is recovered.
Table 25 - Field Power Loss Detection Condition is Resolved - Compact 5000 I/O Digital Output Modules
SA Status
Output I/O Status
Cat. Nos. Tag Value Diagnostic Value Indicator
Behavior Indicator State State
5069-OA16,
5069-OB8,
5069-OB16/B, I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 0 —
5069-OB16F/B, Restarts in its
5069-OB16K/B, commanded FieldPowerOff Off
5069-OW16 diagnostic = 0
state.(1)
• I.Ptxx.FieldPowerOff
5069-OBV8S, tag = 0 Steady green
5069-OBV8SK
• I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 0
(1) If the commanded state is On, the output turns on 100 ms after the Field Power Loss condition is resolved.

IMPORTANT The module can require up to 1 second to complete the recovery in addition
to the Output Error Latch Time.

Field Power Loss Detection has a corresponding tag that can be examined in
the user program if a fault occurs. For information on module s, see Appendix
B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219.

You can also monitor a point for the presence of a field power loss via the
diagnostics that are available in the Module Properties dialog box in Logix
Designer application.

IMPORTANT Keep in mind the following:

• With the 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules, Field Power Loss detection
not only detects the loss of field power at the LA terminals. Field Power Loss
also detects the presence of an undervoltage or overvoltage condition on the
SA power bus where the module resides.
That is, if the SA power bus uses a level of power that is outside the
supported voltage range for the module, the conditions described in
Table 24 on page 100 occur. Undervoltage or overvoltage conditions on the
SA power bus can be detected whether field power is connected to the LA
terminals or not.
• You can use 5069-FPD field potential distributors to establish new SA power
buses that are separate from the one that the controller or EtherNet/IP™
adapter establishes.
• If separate external power supplies are used for each SA power bus, the loss
of field power from one SA power bus does not affect modules that draw
power from other SA power buses.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 101

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

No Load Detection No Load Detection detects when a wire is disconnected from an output or a
load is missing from an output.
Standard Modules

IMPORTANT The following Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules support No Load
Detection:
• 5069-OB8
• 5069-OB16
• 5069-OB16F
• 5069-OB16K
• 5069-OBV8S
• 5069-OBV8SK

No Load Detection with Standard Output Modules

On Compact 5000 I/O standard output modules, No Load detection only works
when the output is in the Off state. A standard output module cannot detect a
No Load condition if the output is in the On state.
A No Load condition can exist when the output is on. However, because
standard output modules cannot detect a No Load condition when the output
is on, the module appears to be working normally on the status indicators and
Safety Modules
in the Logix Designer application project.

No Load Detection is disabled by default on Compact 5000 I/O standard

output modules. You must enable the feature in your Logix Designer
application project in one of the following ways:
• Click Enable No Load Diagnostics for output on the Points category of
the Module Properties dialog box. in the Logix Designer
application project.
• Change the C.Outputxx.NoLoadEn to 1, where xx represents the output
number.
A load that is connected to an output on a standard output module must draw
a minimum of 0.5 mA or it is considered missing.

IMPORTANT An output must remain in the off state a minimum of 250 ms for No Load
condition to be detected.

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Table 26 describes what happens when a No Load condition is detected.

Table 26 - No Load Detection - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules
Tag Value Diagnostic Value I/O Status Indicator State
I.Ptxx.NoLoad tag = 1 No Load diagnostic = 1 Flashing red

To correct the No Load condition, reconnect any disconnected wires or the

load to the output.

Table 27 describes what happens when a No Load condition is corrected.

Table 27 - No Load Detection - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules
Tag Value Diagnostic Value I/O Status Indicator State
I.Ptxx.NoLoad tag = 0 No Load diagnostic = 0 Off

You can monitor a module tag in your program that corresponds to the No
Load Detection to check for a fault. For more information on the tag, see
Appendix B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219.
You can also monitor a point for the presence of a No Load condition via the
diagnostics that are available in the Module Properties dialog box in
Logix Designer application.

For more information on where to configure No Load Detection, see

the following:
• 5069-OB8 - page 175
• 5069-OB16 and 5069-OB16K module - page 176
• 5069-OB16F module - page 177

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 103

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

No Load Detection with Safety Output Modules

On Compact 5000 I/O safety output modules, No Load detection only works
when the output is in the Off state.

A No Load condition can exist when the output is on. However, because safety
output modules cannot detect a No Load condition when the output is on, the
module appears to be working normally on the status indicators and in the
Logix Designer application project.

Table 28 describes how you can use the feature.

Table 28 - No Load Detection Conditions - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules
Operating Conditions Default Setting Change Setting
• Module revision 1.011
Not available
• Default configuration profile in You cannot disable the feature.
Logix Designer application
Enabled To disable the feature, clear the Enable No Load
• Module revision 2.011 or later
Diagnostic checkbox for the output on the Points
• Add-On profile (AOP), version 2.01 or category of the Module Properties dialog box. See
later, in Logix Designer application Figure 11

Figure 11 - Configure No Load Detection—Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules

A load that is connected to an output on a safety output module must draw a

minimum of 10 mA, for example, 2.4 kΩ at 24V DC, or it is considered missing.
This requirement applies if the output is in the Off and On state.

IMPORTANT An output must remain in the off state a minimum of 250 ms for No Load
condition to be detected.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Table 29 describes what happens when a No Load condition is detected.

Table 29 - No Load Detection - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules
Tag Value I/O Status Indicator State
One of the following:
• Flashing red - If the output is off and a No Load condition is detected.
I.Ptxx.NoLoad tag = 1 If the output is off and a No Load condition is detected, but the
• Flashing condition is not corrected and the output turns on.
red/yellow - In this case, the status indicator is flashing red until the safety
output is turned on.

IMPORTANT When the safety output is in the On state, and there was a load detected in
the Off state, the I/O status indicator is steady yellow.
If the load is then lost from the safety output, for example, because a wire gets
disconnected when the safety output is still in the On state, the No Load
condition is not detected.
The I/O status indicator for the safety output remains steady yellow.

Table 30 describes what happens when a No Load condition is corrected.

Table 30 - No Load Detection - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules
Tag Value I/O Status Indicator State
I.Ptxx.NoLoad tag = 0 Off

You can monitor a module tag in your program that corresponds to the No
Load Detection to check for a fault. For more information on the tag, see
Appendix B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219.

You can also monitor a point for the presence of a No Load condition via the
diagnostics that are available in the Module Properties dialog box in
Logix Designer application.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 105

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Short Circuit Protection Short Circuit Protection helps prevent damage to the output that can result
Standard Modules when more current is present at the output than it can handle.

IMPORTANT The following Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules support Short Circuit
Detection:
• 5069-OB8
• 5069-OB16
• 5069-OB16F
• 5069-OB16K
• 5069-OBV8S
• 5069-OBV8SK

Short Circuit Protection with Standard Output Modules

Table 31 describes what happens when a short circuit condition is detected on
a Compact 5000 I/O standard output module.
Table 31 - Short Circuit Protection - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules
I/O Status Indicator
Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
Safety Modules • Faults
I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1 Short Circuit diagnostic = 1 Flashing red
• Turns off

To correct the issue, you must remove the short circuit condition.
Table 32 describes what happens when the short circuit condition is corrected
on a Compact 5000 I/O standard output module.
Table 32 - Short Circuit Protection - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules
I/O Status Indicator
Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
Restarts in its I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit tag = 0 Short Circuit diagnostic = 0 Steady yellow
commanded state

For more information on the maximum current that you can apply to an
output, see the Compact 5000 I/O Modules and EtherNet/IP Adapters
Technical Data, publication 5069-TD001.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Short Circuit Protection with Safety Output Modules

Table 33 describes what happens when a short circuit condition is detected on
a Compact 5000 I/O safety output module.
Table 33 - Short Circuit Protection - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules
I/O Status Indicator
Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
One of the following:
• If the output point was shorted
One of the following: to 24V DC when the short One of the following:
• If the output point is shorted to circuit condition was detected, • Flashes red if the
• Faults 24V DC, the I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit the Short Circuit diagnostic = 1. output point is shorted
• Turns off tag = 1. • If the output point is shorted to to 24V DC.
• If the output point is shorted to ground when the short circuit • Off if the output point is
ground, no tags are changed. condition was detected, the shorted to ground.
Short Circuit to Ground
diagnostic = 1.

Table 34 describes what happens when the short circuit condition is removed
from a Compact 5000 I/O safety output module and the data is set to safe state,
that is, the off state.
Table 34 - Short Circuit Protection - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules
I/O Status Indicator
Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
One of the following:
• If the output point was shorted
to 24V DC when the short
circuit condition was detected,
One of the following: the Short Circuit diagnostic =
• If the output point is shorted to 0.
Restarts in its 24V DC, the I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit Turns off if there is no
IMPORTANT: You must cycle longer a load that is
commanded state tag = 0. power to the module to reset connected to the output.
• If the output point is shorted to the diagnostic.
ground, no tags are changed. • If the output point is shorted to
ground when the short circuit
condition was detected, the
Short Circuit to Ground
diagnostic = 0.

For more information on the maximum current that you can apply to an
output, see the Compact 5000 I/O Modules and EtherNet/IP Adapters
Technical Data, publication 5069-TD001.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 107

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Other Conditions That Can Trigger the Short Circuit Diagnostic on the
5069-OBV8S or 5069-OBV8SK Module
Table 35 describes conditions that can trigger the Short Circuit diagnostic.
Table 35 - Conditions That Trigger Short Circuit Diagnostic
Output I/O Status Indicator
Conditions Possible Tag and Diagnostic Combinations
Behavior State
Combination 1
• I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1
• Short Circuit diagnostic = 1
• I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1
• Output Mode - Sourcing Combination 2
• Point Operation Type - Single • I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1
• Faults
• Point Mode - Safety Pulse Test • Internal Fault diagnostic = 1
• Turns off
• O.Ptxx.Data tag = 1 Combination 3
• Output point is shorted to 24V DC. • I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1
• Internal Fault diagnostic = 1
• Overload Fault diagnostic = 1
IMPORTANT: The tag and diagnostic combinations that are described occur on the
faulted output point and all of its associated group points.
Combination 1
The following conditions exist on a pair of module • I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1 The I/O status
outputs: indicator for the
• I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1 faulted output point
• Output Mode - Sourcing • Short Circuit diagnostic = 1 turns off.
• Point Operation Type - Dual • Faults • Internal Fault diagnostic = 1
• Point Mode - Safety Pulse Test • Turns off Combination 2
• O.Ptxx.Data tag = 1 (Either output point in the pair) • I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1
• Output point is shorted to 24V DC (Either output • Internal Fault diagnostic = 1
point in the pair). IMPORTANT: The tag and diagnostic combinations that are described occur on the
faulted output point and all of its associated group points.
Combination 1
The following conditions exist on a pair of module • I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1 (Both output points in the pair)
outputs: • Short Circuit diagnostic = 1 (Both output points in the pair)
• Output Mode - Sourcing • Faults • I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1
• Point Operation Type - Dual • Turns off Combination 2
• O.Ptxx.Data tag = 1 (Both output points in the pair) • I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1 (Faulted output point and all of its associated group points)
• Output points are shorted to each other. • Internal Fault diagnostic = 1 (Faulted output point and all of its associated group
points

When the conditions that trigger the diagnostics as described in Table 35 are
corrected, the results are the same as described in Table 34 on page 107.

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Configure Internal Short Circuit Detection for 5069-OBV8S

and 5069-OBV8SK
For 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK safety modules, FW revision 3.011 with
AOP revision 3.01 provides a new feature to enable or disable Internal Short
Circuit Test. The Internal Short Circuit Test generates a pulse to Safety Output
in Safety Mode.

ATTENTION: Internal Short Circuit Test is needed when used in Functional

Safety applications.

IMPORTANT Internal Short Circuit Detection is only configurable when Sourcing is selected
under Module Output Mode, and Safety Pulse Test is not selected under Point
Mode.
Internal Short Circuit Detection is enabled or disabled per selected Points group
with:
• Even-numbered points (Point 0, 2, 4, and 6)
• Odd-numbered points (Point 1, 3, 5, and 7)

Table 36 describes how you can use the Short Circuit Detection enable or
disable feature.
Table 36 - Internal Short Circuit Detection Conditions–Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules
Default
Operating Conditions Change Setting
Setting
• Module revision 1.011
• Default configuration profile in
Logix Designer application Not available
• Module revision 2.011 You cannot disable the feature.
• Add-On profile, version 2.01, in
Logix Designer application
• Make sure the Module Output Mode is Sourcing.
(See Figure 12)
• To disable the detection on Points 0, 2, 4, and 6:
Enabled – Verify the Point Modes for Points 0, 2, 4, and 6 are either
Safety or Not Used (1)
• Module revision 3.011 or later – Check the Disable Internal Short Circuit Detection on Even-
• Add-On profile, version 3.01 or later, in Numbered Points checkbox. (See Figure 13)
Logix Designer application
• To disable the detection on Points 1, 3, 5, and 7:
– Verify the Point Modes for Points 1, 3, 5, and 7 are either
Safety or Not Used (1)
– Check the Disable Internal Short Circuit Detection on
Odd-Numbered Points checkbox. (See Figure 14)
(1) If 1 or more Point Modes in the group are set as Safety Pulse Test, the warning box is displayed (see Figure 15 on page 111). If the
user clicks Yes, the corresponding Point Modes will be updated as Safety automatically; Otherwise, Internal Short Circuit Detection
for the group will continue as enable. The checkbox is cleared.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 109

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Figure 12 - Disable Internal Short Circuit Detection—Use Output Mode: Sourcing

Figure 13 - Disable Internal Short Circuit Detection—Even-Numbered Points

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Figure 14 - Disable Internal Short Circuit Detection—Odd-Numbered Points

Figure 15 - Pop-up warning when Safety Pulse Test is selected under Point Mode

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 111

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Output Recovery After Overload or Short Circuit to Ground Condition

Table 37 describes test output recovery after overload or short circuit to ground
conditions occur.
Table 37 - Output Recovery - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules
Cause of Fault Module Operating Conditions Correction Recovery Time
Remove the load from the output
point.
When safety output module After the condition is
resides in a remote Compact corrected, and the output
5000 I/O system, the connection is returned to the safe
• Output Point Mode - Safety or to the Compact 5000 EtherNet/IP state, it recovers in
Safety Pulse Test. adapter can break. whichever of the
Overload Condition • Output Data tag = 1. When the cable break occurs and following times is higher:
• Overload current ≥ 1.5 A then recovers, the load recovers • 10 seconds
if the command state of the • Output Error Latch
output point is still high even if Time - This time is set
the command state in the on the Points category
program did not go to the safe of the Module
state. Properties dialog box.
• Output Point Mode - Safety or To see where to set the
Safety Pulse Test. Remove the output connection to Output Error Latch Time,
Short Circuit to Ground • Output Data tag = 1. ground and set the output to a go to page 194.
Condition
• Output is connected directly to safe state.
ground.

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Thermal Shutoff Thermal Shutoff helps prevent damage to the output that can result when an
output gets hotter than it can handle.
Standard Modules

IMPORTANT The following Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules support the Thermal
Shutoff feature:
• 5069-OB8
• 5069-OB16
• 5069-OB16F
• 5069-OB16K
• 5069-OBV8S
• 5069-OBV8SK

This feature is directly related to Short Circuit Protection feature. The

increased temperature at the output results from an excessive load at the
output. That is, a load with high current is applied to the output. The high
current heats the output beyond an acceptable temperature and the output
turns off.

Thermal Shutoff with Standard Output Modules

Table 38 describes what happens when a thermal shutoff condition is detected
Safety Modules on Compact 5000 I/O standard output modules.
Table 38 - Thermal Shutoff - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules
I/O Status Indicator
Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
• Faults
I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit tag = 1 — Flashing red
• Turns off

Table 39 describes what happens when the thermal shutoff condition is

corrected on Compact 5000 I/O standard output modules.
Table 39 - Thermal Shutoff - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules
I/O Status Indicator
Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
Turns off if there is no
Restarts in its I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit tag = 0 — longer a load that is
commanded state. connected to the output.

For more information on how to use the modules, see Appendix B, Module Tag
Definitions on page 219.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 113

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Thermal Shutoff with a Safety Output Module

Table 40 describes what happens when a thermal shutoff condition is detected
on a Compact 5000 I/O safety output module.
Table 40 - Thermal Shutoff - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module
I/O Status Indicator
Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
One of the following: One of the following:
• If the output point is shorted • If the output point is shorted
to 24V DC when the thermal to 24V DC when the thermal
shutoff condition occurred, shutoff condition occurred,
• Faults the I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit there is no change in the
tag = 1. diagnostics. Steady red
• Turns off
• If the output point is shorted • If the output point is shorted
to ground when the thermal to ground when the thermal
shutoff condition occurred, shutoff condition occurred,
there is no change to the the ShortCircuitGround
tags. diagnostic = 1.

Table 41 describes what happens when the thermal shutoff condition is

corrected on a Compact 5000 I/O safety output module.
Table 41 - Thermal Shutoff - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module
I/O Status Indicator
Output Behavior Tag Value Diagnostic Value State
One of the following:
• If the output point was
shorted to 24V DC when the
thermal shutoff condition
occurred, the Overload
diagnostic = 0.
IMPORTANT: You must cycle Turns off if there is no
Remains in the off state I.Ptxx.ShortCircuit tag = 0 power to the module to reset longer a load that is
the diagnostic. connected to the output.
• If the output point was
shorted to ground when the
thermal shutoff condition
occurred, the
ShortCircuitGround diagnostic
= 0.

For more information on how to use the modules, see Appendix B, Module Tag
Definitions on page 219.

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Fault and Status Reporting The output modules multicast fault and status data with channel data to the
Standard Modules owner and listening controllers. The data is returned via module s that you can
monitor in your Logix Designer application.

Not all tags that are listed in Table 42 apply to all Compact 5000 I/O digital
output modules. For example, the 5069-OB8 module uses the Ptxx.NoLoad tag.
The 5069-OW4I module does not.

IMPORTANT For the 5069-OB16, 5069-OB16F, and 5069-OB16K output modules only, an output
must remain in the on state for a minimum of 250 ms for an overload or short
circuit to be detected. However, if a short circuit condition exists long term, it is
detected as long as the output is switching at a rate no faster than 1 ms.

Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules

Table 42 lists tags that are used on Compact 5000 I/O standard
output modules.

IMPORTANT For more information on the valid values for each tag in Table 42, see Appendix
B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219.
Safety Modules

Table 42 - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules - Fault and Data Status
Data Type Tag Name Triggering Event That Sets
(1) The owner-controller loses its connection to the module.
ConnectionFaulted
Ptxx.Fault The point data quality is bad.
Fault Ptxx.NoLoad A no load condition exists on the point.
Ptxx.ShortCircuit A short circuit condition exists on the point.
Ptxx.FieldPowerOff A field power lost condition exists on the point.
RunMode The module is in Run Mode.
DiagnosticActive Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached.
DiagnosticSequenceCount The count increments each time that a diagnostic condition is detected or removed.
Status
Ptxx.Data The point input status is 0 or 1.
Ptxx.Uncertain The point data can be imperfect.
Uncertain(1) The module is operating outside its designed operating range if data is under manual or override control.
(1) This tag provides module-wide data an affects all channels simultaneously.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 115

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules

Table 43 lists tags that are used on Compact 5000 I/O safety output modules.

IMPORTANT For more information on the valid values for each tag in Table 43, see
Appendix B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219.

Table 43 - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules - Fault and Data Status
Data Type Tag Name Triggering Event That Sets
(1) The owner-controller loses its connection to the module.
ConnectionFaulted
Ptxx.Fault The point data quality is bad or the channel is set to Not Used.
Fault
Ptxx.ShortCircuit A short circuit condition exists on the point.
Ptxx.FieldPowerOff A field power lost condition exists on the point.
RunMode The module is in Run Mode.
DiagnosticActive Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached.
DiagnosticSequenceCount The count increments each time that a diagnostic condition is detected or removed.
Status
Ptxx.Readback A 24V DC power source is connected to the output circuit.
Ptxx.Data The data currently at the point.
Ptxx.Uncertain The point data can be imperfect.
(1) This tag provides module-wide data an affects all channels simultaneously.

For more information on fault reporting, see Appendix A, Troubleshoot Your

Module on page 201.

Output State Change Time Table 44 lists the time that it takes for Compact 5000 I/O standard output
module outputs to change state after a command.
Standard Modules
Table 44 - Time for a Module Output to Change State

Module Time(1)
1/2 cycle, typical
For example, if the input uses a 50 Hz AC wave, 1 cycle = 1/50 or 20 ms.
5069-OA16 Because the typical time for the module output to change state is 1/2 cycle, in this
example the time is 10 ms.
5069-OB8 100 µs
5069-OB16, 5069-OB16K 100 µs
5069-OB16F 10 µs
5069-OW4I 10 ms
5069-OW16 10 ms
5069-OX4I 15 ms
(1) The times that are listed in Table 44 are from the time the module receives the message.

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Configurable Channel-level You can configure individual output channels to specific states when the
Output State in Program module is in Program mode or Fault mode. The following output states are
available:
Mode or Fault Mode • Off
Standard Modules
• On
• Hold last state

To see how to configure the output states in Program mode or Fault mode, see
the following:
• 5069-OA16 module - page 174
• 5069-OB8 module - page 175
• 5069-OB16 and 5069-OB16K modules - page 176
• 5069-OB16F module - page 177
• 5069-OW4I module - page 178
• 5069-OW16 module - page 179
• 5069-OX4I module - page 180

Connection Fault Handling You can configure Compact 5000 I/O standard module behavior when a
connection fault occurs, that is, the connection between the owner-controller
Standard Modules and the output module breaks.

You must define the following:

• Immediate Output behavior when the connection breaks.
• Length of time that the output behaves as defined.
• Output behavior if the connection remains broken when the length of
time that is defined previously expires.

Output Behavior Immediately After a Connection Fault

When the connection between an owner-controller and output module breaks,
the output can behave in the following ways, depending on how the Fault
Mode parameter is configured:
• Turn off - Default
• Transition to a specific, user-defined value.
• Hold its last state.

If you configure the output to hold its last state, the output remains at that state
value until the following occurs:
- The connection to the owner-controller is re-established.
- The output returns to normal operation, as defined in the module
configuration.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 117

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

The output state remains as commanded if Fault State Duration is set to

Forever.

If the Fault State Duration is set to a value other than Forever, the output state
changes to a user-configurable Final Fault State after the specified time period
elapses. For more information, see Final Fault State Value on page 118.

Fault State Duration After Connection Fault

If you configure the output to transition to a specific value after the connection
breaks, you must define how long the output remains at the specified value
before it transitions to a Final Fault State.

You can configure the output to remain at the specific value for the following
times:
• Forever
• 1 second
• 2 seconds
• 5 seconds
• 10 seconds

After the Fault State Duration time expires, the output transitions to user-
defined Final Fault State Value.

Final Fault State Value

The Final Fault State value defines the value to which the output goes after the
Fault State Duration time expires.

You set the value in the C.Ptxx.FaultFinalState tag. For more information on
module s, see Appendix B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219.

Output State Once Connection Is Re-established

Once the connection between the owner-controller and output module is re-
established, the output resumes normal operation.

To see where to configure the Connection Fault Handling parameters, see the
following:
• 5069-OA16 module - page 174
• 5069-OB8 module - page 175
• 5069-OB16 and 5069-OB16K modules - page 176
• 5069-OB16F module - page 177
• 5069-OW4I module - page 178
• 5069-OW16 module - page 179
• 5069-OX4I module - page 180

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Forcing Use a force to override data that your logic either uses or produces.
• Test and debug your logic.
Standard Modules
• Temporarily maintain normal system operations when an input device
has failed.

Use forces only as a temporary measure. They are not intended to be a

permanent part of your application.

Make sure that you understand this before you use forces.

ATTENTION: Forcing can cause unexpected machine motion that could injure
personnel. Before you use a force, determine how the force affects your
machine or process and keep personnel away from the machine area.
• Enabling I/O or SFC forces causes your machine or process to go to another
state or phase.
• Removing forces can still leave forces in the enabled state.
If forces are enabled and you install a force, the new force immediately takes
effect.

Enable Forces
For a force to take effect, you enable forces. You can only enable and disable
forces at the controller level.
• You can enable I/O forces and SFC forces separately or simultaneously.
• You cannot enable or disable forces for a specific module, tag collection,
or tag element.

Disable or Remove a Force

To stop the effect of a force and let your project execute as programmed,
disable or remove the force.
• You can disable or remove I/O and SFC forces simultaneously or
separately.
• When you remove a force on an alias tag, you also remove the force on
the base tag.

ATTENTION: Changes to forces can cause unexpected machine motion that

could injure personnel. Before you disable or remove forces, determine how the
change affects your machine or process and keep personnel away from the
machine area.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 119

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Check Force Status

Before you use a force, determine the status of forces for the controller.

The Online toolbar shows the status of forces. It shows the status of I/O forces
and SFC forces separately.

To Determine the Status of This Use Any of The Following

• Online toolbar
I/O forces
• GSV instruction
SFC forces Online toolbar

Forces tab

Forces Tab Status Means

• If the project contains any forces of this type, they are overriding
Enabled your logic.
• If you add a force of this type, the new force immediately takes effect
Forces of this type are inactive. If the project contains any forces of this
Disabled type, they are not overriding your logic.
Installed At least one force of this type exists in the project.
None Installed No forces of this type exist in the project.

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

GSV Instruction
This example shows how to use a GSV instruction to get the status of forces.
For the purposes of this example, Force_Status is a DINT tag.

To Determine This Examine This bit For This Value

Forces are installed. 0 1
No forces are installed. 0 0
Forces are enabled. 1 1
Forces are disabled. 1 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 121

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Time-scheduled You can schedule times for module outputs to turn On or Off. The time
Output Control schedules use units in nanoseconds.

IMPORTANT This feature is available only on the 5069-OB16F module.

Standard Modules

The timing of scheduled outputs for the 5069-OB16F module is as follows:

- ±10 μs accuracy
- 1 ns resolution

The module must be time synced or schedules are not applied.

Time-scheduled output control is used with the Motion Arm Output Cam
(MAOC) instruction. The MAOC instruction enables position-based output
control in the following ways:
• Uses the position of any motion axis in a Logix 5000™ control system as
the position reference
• Updates the outputs based on the motion axis position at the motion
group coarse update rate, typically 1…32 ms.

The instruction can update standard output modules at the coarse update rate.
However, some high-speed applications require a higher degree of accuracy.

The 5069-OB16F scheduled output module improves the accuracy of the MAOC
instruction by supporting the ability to schedule output On and Off times. All
scheduling configuration for the On and Off times of an output is completed
through the MAOC instruction. The instruction then updates values in the
output s of the module that define the scheduled output behavior.
Table 45 - 5069-OB16F Output Module Schedule Parameters
Feature 5069-OB16F
Number of schedules 32
Output points available for scheduling 16 (points 0…15)
Remote operation —
100 µs
Minimum schedule interval(1) For schedules output the MAOC instruction, you can use 50
µs.
(1) The MAOC limits the minimum schedule interval (minimum pulse width) to 1/16 of the coarse update period.

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 4 Output Module Features

Use an MAOC Instruction with a 5069-OB16F Output Module

To use an MAOC instruction with schedule outputs on a 5069-OB16F output
module, complete the following steps. The module can be a local I/O module or
remote I/O module.

IMPORTANT Before you complete the steps, make sure that Time Synchronization
is enabled in the controller and, if applicable, the EtherNet/IP
adapter, to use scheduled outputs.

1. If necessary, add a 5069-OB16F output module to your Logix Designer

application project.

For more information on how to add a 5069-OB16F output module to a Logix

Designer application and configure the module, see Chapter 6, Configure a
Standard Module on page 143.
2. From the Module Properties dialog box, click Change to access the
Module Definition parameters.

3. On the Module Definition dialog box, choose Scheduled Data for the
Output Data and click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 123

Chapter 4 Output Module Features

4. To close the Module Properties dialog box, click OK.

5. Add an MAOC instruction to your logic.
6. In the MAOC instruction, use the module output tag in the Output
operand, for example Local:1:O for a local output module.

The tag value displays as ??. This value is correct.

For more information on how to use an MAOC instruction in general, see

the following:
• Logix 5000 Controllers Motion Instructions Reference Manual,
publication MOTION-RM002
• Position-based Output Control with the MAOC Instruction Application
Technique, publication 1756-AT017

Isolated and Non-isolated The 5069-OW4I and 5069-OX4I standard output modules provide point-to-
Varieties of Output Modules point wiring isolation.

IMPORTANT Although some Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules do not provide
Standard Modules wiring isolation, all Compact 5000 I/O digital output modules maintain
internal electrical isolation between the system-side and field-side power
buses.

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 5

Safety Module Features

Topic Page
Safety Input Module Features 125
Safety Output Module Features 138
Fault and Status Reporting 142

This chapter describes features that are specific to Compact 5000™ I/O
safety modules.

Safety Input This section describes features that are available on the Compact 5000 I/O
Module Features safety input module, that is, the 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules.

The 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules are 8-point safety sinking input
modules that use eight safety inputs and four test outputs. The 5069-IB8SK
module offers conformal coating.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 125

Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Safety Application Suitability Levels

Table 46 describes the safety application suitability levels for a 5069-IB8S and
5069-IB8SK module.
Table 46 - Safety Application Suitability for 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK Modules
Suitability Level Conditions Notes
Safety applications that are rated up to, Consider the following:
and including, SIL CL 3, PLd, Cat. 3 as • The module uses single-channel • The channel mode type, that is, single or dual, affects Performance Level and Category. You
defined in IEC 61508, IEC 61511, IEC mode.
can use the modules in SIL CL 3 applications regardless of channel mode type.
(1) • Point Mode is Safety Pulse Test. The determining factor to whether a Compact 5000 I/O safety module resides in a SIL CL 3,
62061, and ISO 13849-1.
PLe, Cat. 4 safety application is that the overall safety architecture be a dual-channel
system.
• To achieve SIL CL 3 single-channel, the sensor that is used must be SIL CL 3 single-channel
Safety applications that are rated up to, • The module uses dual-channel as well.
and including, SIL CL 3, PLe, Cat. 4 as • The requirement that Point Mode be Safety Pulse Test assumes that only the safety modules
defined in IEC 61508, IEC 61511, IEC mode.(2)
• Point Mode is Safety Pulse Test. provide diagnostics to a specific Suitability Level.
62061, and ISO 13849-1. The larger safety system within which the safety modules reside can provide the diagnostics
necessary to achieve the stated Suitability Level without the requirement that Point Mode be
Safety Pulse Test.
(1) Single channel could not be verified to PLe, Cat. 4 without a single channel sensor that is PLe, Cat. 4 rated.
(2) You do not configure the module to use dual-channel mode via the Logix Designer application module properties dialog box. You use a safety instruction to use the module in dual-channel mode.

The following apply to the safety inputs:

• You can connect safety devices, such as Emergency Stop Push Button,
gate switches, and safety light curtains.
• Evaluate an input signal, that is, input data, in single-channel mode or
dual-channel mode.
• An external wiring short circuit check is possible when inputs are wired
in combination with test outputs. The module must be wired in
combination with test outputs when this function is used.
• Independently adjustable on and off delays are available per channel.

The following apply to the test standard outputs:

• Separate test outputs are provided for short circuit detection of a safety
input (or inputs).
• Can supply 24V DC power to devices, such as safety sensors.
• As many as two specific test outputs can be used for broken-wire
detection of a muting lamp.

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Use Test Output with a Safety Input

A test output can be used in combination with a safety input for short circuit
and cross-channel fault detection.

In this case, Point Mode must be Safety Pulse Test. Safety input pairs must be
associated with different Test Output sources.
The test output can also be configured as a power supply to source 24V DC to an
external device, for example, a light curtain.
Figure 16 - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module - Input Connected to Test Output

Channel Connections
The diagram shows devices that are connected to safety input
channels 0 and 3 and test output channel 0 and 1. You are not
restricted to using only those channels.
You can connect devices to any safety input channel or
combination of channels as needed.
We recommend that you connect even-numbered input points
to even-numbered test output points and odd-numbered
input points to odd-numbered test output points.
This wiring practice can maximize diagnostic independence
and separation.

Safety Input 0
SA Power
Connections to an external power supply that provides SA Safety Input 1
power via the SA Power RTB on one of the following: Safety Input 2
• Compact GuardLogix® 5380 Controller
• 5069-AENTR or 5069-AEN2TR EtherNet/IP™ Adapter Safety Input 3
• 5069-FPD Field Potential Distributor Safety Input 4
IMPORTANT: Remember the following:
• The 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules use DC SA power. Safety Input 5
You must connect DC power to the component, that is, Safety Input 6
controller, adapter, or field potential distributor, that
provides SA Power to the modules. Safety Input 7
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power
Test Output 0
and DC SA power, you must install them on separate SA
power buses. Test Output 0
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish
Test Output 1
a new SA Power bus in a system. SA Power buses are
isolated from each other. To keep the modules on Test Output 1
separate SA Power buses, complete the following steps.
Test Output/Muting Output 2
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for
example DC, to the right of the adapter or controller, Test Output/Muting Output 2
that is, the first SA Power bus.
2.Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to Test Output/Muting Output 3
establish a second SA Power bus. Test Output/Muting Output 3
3.Install the modules that use the other type of SA power,
for example AC, on the second SA Power bus. COM
COM

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 127

Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Figure 17 - 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK Test Pulse in a Cycle

On

OUT
X
Off
Y

On the 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module, the test pulse width (X) is less than
700 μs; the test pulse period (Y) is less than 100 ms.

When the external input contact is closed, a test pulse is output from the test
output terminal to diagnose the field wiring and input circuitry. By using this
function, short-circuits between inputs and 24V power, and between input
signal lines can be detected.
Figure 18 - Short Circuit Between Input Signal Lines

IN +
24V DC

COM
24V DC

0V DC
TO0

External Contact

Short circuit between input signal lines

IN 0 and power supply (positive side)

TO1

External Contact

Short circuit between channels 0

IN 1
and 1.

128 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Single-channel Mode
If an error is detected on the input channel, Safety Input Data and Safety Input
Status turn off.

For information on how to use single-channel mode with a 5069-IB8S or

5069-IB8SK module affects the safety application suitability level, see Table 46
on page 126.
Figure 19 - Normal Operation and Fault Detection (Not to Scale)

24V DC
Test Output 0
0V DC

ON
External Device
OFF

Normal Operation ON
Input Terminal 0
OFF

ON
Safety Input 0
Safety Network Data Sent Data OFF
to the Controller
ON
Safety Input 0
Status OFF

24V DC
Test Output 0
0V DC

ON
External Device
OFF

ON
Input Terminal 0
Fault Detection OFF

ON Fault Detected
Safety Input 0
Data OFF
Safety Network Data Sent
to the Controller
ON Fault is declared at the
Safety Input 0 end of the Test Output
Status OFF pulse.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 129

Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Safety Input Fault Recovery

If an error is detected, the safety input data remains in the OFF state. To
activate the safety input data again, complete the following steps.
1. Remove the cause of the error.
2. Place the safety input (or safety inputs) into the safe state.
3. Allow the Input Error Latch Time to elapse.

After the steps are completed, the I/O indicator (red) turns off. The input data
is now active.

Safety Input Delay Time

You can increase the time that it takes for an input point to transition from On
to Off and Off to On on the 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module. The increase in
time is a delay of the signal from the module to the controller.
The delay time is in addition to the RPI, the parameter that defines a rate at
which the owner-controller and the module exchange data (2…500 ms). For
example, if you set the RPI at 10 ms and use an input delay time of 2 ms, the
signal from the module to the controller is 12 ms.

When chattering or low frequency noise coupling is present on the input

signal, an increase in the time it takes to transition from one state to another
improves noise immunity within a signal.

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Off to On Delay

An input signal is treated as Logic 0 during the Off to On delay time after the
rising edge of the input contact.

The input turns on only if the input contact remains on after the Off to On
delay time has elapsed. This setting help prevent rapid changes of the input
data due to contact bounce.

You can delay the Off to On transition by the following times:

• 0 ms (default)
• 1 ms
• 2 ms
• 5 ms
• 10 ms
• 20 ms
• 50 ms
Figure 20 - Off to On Delay

ON
Input Signal
OFF

ON
Safety Input
Network Data
OFF

Off to On Delay

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 131

Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

On to Off Delay

An input signal is treated as Logic 1 during the On to Off delay time after the
falling edge of the input contact.

The input turns off only if the input contact remains off after the On to Off
delay time has elapsed. This setting helps to prevent rapid changes of the input
data due to contact bounce.

You can delay the On to Off transition by the following times:

• 0 ms (default)
• 1 ms
• 2 ms
• 5 ms
• 10 ms
• 20 ms
• 50 ms
Figure 21 - On to Off Delay

ON
Input Signal
OFF

ON
Safety Input
Network Data
OFF

On to Off Delay

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Muting Lamp Operation

Your controller program controls test outputs 2…3 to illuminate a muting
lamp. Muting lamp status is monitored with a test that runs periodically
during every test interval to detect a burned-out lamp. The test runs repeatedly
when the test output is commanded On or commanded Off and a fault is
detected.

Figure 22 shows how muting lamp operation, status, and fault detection are
monitored.
The lamp test interval is 3 seconds. Two consecutive failed lamp tests are required
to declare a burned-out lamp condition.
The lamp test does not always run immediately after the test output is energized. It
starts at the next 3-second interval. To allow time for two consecutive test intervals,
program a minimum Test Output On Time of 6 seconds.
Figure 22 - Muting Lamp Timing Diagram
Connected
Connected
Disconnected
Muting Lamp 1 - Burnt-out lamp detected
Disconnected 2 - Good lamp detected
3 - Intermittent lamp testing stopped
Test Time 4 - Intermittent lamp testing started

Active

1 2 3 4
Lamp Test

Inactive

Test Interval

Bulb Connected/Good
Good

Muting Status
Bulb Disconnected/Burnt out
Burn-out

On
On

TO3 Output

Off Off

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 133

Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Table 47 shows the expected behavior of the muting status for test outputs
TO2M and TO3M. Keep the following points in mind as well:
• When power is applied to the 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module, and T2
or T3 remains commanded off, the muting status defaults to on.
This bit operation is designed to help prevent erroneous muting
instruction faults from the owner-controller. This bit status is not always
the true indication of a burned-out lamp.

IMPORTANT Before checking the state of the corresponding muting

status, be sure that the test output is commanded on. Once
the test output is commanded on, a maximum time of 6
seconds is required for the module to detect a burned-out
lamp.
• If a muting lamp circuit is open when power is applied to the module, the
condition is detected when the test output is commanded on.
• When a lamp burns out and is replaced, the fault (muting status bit)
returns to the normal condition, independent of the state of the test
output.
Table 47 - Muting Status Bit Operation
Test Output
Lamp Condition Muting Status
Commanded Description
Bit
State
Bad (open
ON 0 Repair lamp.
circuit)
ON Good 1 Normal condition. Lamp is operating properly.
Bad (open
OFF 0 If lamp remains OFF after T1/T3 output cycled, repair lamp.
circuit)
OFF Good 1 Normal condition.

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Discrepancy
This section describes the following:
• Single Channel SIL 3 and Discrepancy Fault
• Transition Time Limit
• Fault Indication

Single Channel SIL 3 and Discrepancy Fault

The 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules are certified to a single-channel SIL 3

input design. The design creates internal dual-channel signals. The module
takes the signal from one input channel terminal and creates two independent
input paths inside its circuitry. The internal signals, one on each independent
path, are then evaluated for consistency.

The Discrepancy feature on a 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules lets the

module compare the states of the two internal signals to see if they are
different.

If the time of the discrepancy between the two internal signals exceeds the
configured Transition Time Limit, that is, 2…500 ms, the safety input data and
the individual-safety input status turn off for the input channel. The safety
input is in the safe state.

However, a discrepancy can exist for a period of time before the safety input
data fault is generated.
• If the discrepancy is resolved before the time expires, there is no fault.
• If the discrepancy remains when the time expires, a fault occurs.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 135

Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Transition Time Limit

The Transition Time Limit (TTL) is a new configuration in firmware revision

2.011 that defines the time duration that a 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module
lets a discrepancy due to the input voltage rise or fall time variance exist and
does not report a fault. Modules with firmware revision 1.011, that is the initial
revision, have a fixed TTL of 2 ms.

After the transition, the 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module continues to check

the two internal signals for the TTL value; the TTL value is user-configurable
from 2…500 ms. You must install Add-On Profile, version 2.01 to see the
pull-down menu when you configure the module.

When the transition occurs in one of the internal signals before the transition
of the second internal signal, a discrepancy occurs. The threshold voltages for
the signals are slightly different.
• If the second internal signal transitions to the same state before the
Transition Time Limit elapses, the internal inputs are considered
equivalent.
In this case, no error is detected.
• If the second internal signal transition does not occur before the
Transition Time Limit elapses, the channel faults.
In the fault state, the input and status for the input channel is set low
(OFF).

136 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Figure 23 shows conditions in which a discrepancy occurs. By the end of the

TTL, the discrepancy is resolved. A fault does not occur. Safety input and status
data continues to be sent to the controller.
Figure 23 - Normal Operation (Not to Scale)

IN 0

ON
Internal Signal 1 from IN 0
OFF

ON
Normal Operation Internal Signal 2 from IN 0
OFF
Transition Time Limit

Safety Input 0 Data Sent to Controller

Safety Input 0 Status Data Sent to Controller

Figure 24 shows conditions in which a discrepancy occurs. By the end of the

TTL, the discrepancy is not resolved. A fault occurs. Safety input data and
status data are sent to the controller. The input is in the safe state, and the
status is fault.
Figure 24 - Fault Detection (Not to Scale
)

IN 0

ON
Internal Signal 1 from IN 0
OFF

Fault Detection ON
Internal Signal 2 from IN 0
OFF
Transition Time Limit

Safety Input 0 Data Sent to Controller Fault Detected

Safety Input 0 Status Data Sent to Controller Fault Detected

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 137

Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Fault Indication

When a discrepancy fault occurs, the 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module

indicates that a fault exists. However, there is no actual discrepancy fault bit
provided in the I/O tag structure, it only uses Fault = 1.

When the fault occurs, the input tags appear as follows:

• I.Ptxx.Data = 0
• I.Ptxx.Fault = 1
Where xx represents the point number.

To clear the fault and return the module to normal operations, reset the
module. That is, cycle power to the module.

Safety Output This section describes features that are available only on the Compact 5000
Module Features I/O safety output modules, that is, the 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK
modules.

The 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules are safety output module that
uses eight safety outputs. You use the outputs in one of the following ways:
• Sourcing/sinking outputs in Bipolar Output mode
• Sourcing outputs in Sourcing Output mode.

The only difference between the 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules is

that the 5069-OBV8SK module has conformal coating.

Safety Application Suitability Levels

Table 48 describes the safety application suitability levels for 5069-OBV8S and
5069-OBV8SK modules.
Table 48 - Safety Application Suitability for 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Modules
Suitability Level Conditions Notes
Safety applications that are rated up to, and • Output Mode is Sourcing. Consider the following:
including, SIL CL 3, PLd, Cat. 3 as defined in IEC • The module uses single-channel mode. • The channel mode type, that is, single or
61508, IEC 61511, IEC 62061, and ISO 13849-1. • Point Mode is Safety Pulse Test. dual, affects Category. You can use the
modules in SIL CL 3, PLe applications
• Output Mode is Bipolar. regardless of channel mode type.
• Point Mode is Safety Pulse Test The determining factor to whether a
Or Compact 5000 I/O safety module resides in
a SIL CL 3, PLe, Cat. 4 safety application is
• The module uses single-channel mode. that the overall safety architecture be a
• Output Mode is Sourcing. dual-channel system.
Safety applications that are rated up to, and • Point Mode is Safety Pulse Test. • The requirement that Point Mode be Safety
including, SIL CL 3, PLe, Cat. 4 as defined in IEC • The channel is connected to an IEC 60947 certified actuator or contactor. Pulse Test assumes that only the safety
61508, IEC 61511, IEC 62061, and ISO 13849-1. Additionally, you must use shielded cable or cable trunk to mitigate short modules provide diagnostics to a specific
circuit faults on the channel. Suitability Level.
Or The larger safety system within which the
• The module uses dual-channel mode. safety I/O module resides can provide the
• Output Mode is Sourcing. diagnostics necessary to achieve the stated
• Point Mode is Safety Pulse Test. Suitability Level without the requirement
that Point Mode be Safety Pulse Test.

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

• Solid-state outputs
• Single-channel mode uses one output signal, that is, data from an output
channel, to provide control.

IMPORTANT Single-channel mode is only certified for functional safety

applications with process safety times greater than or equal to
200 ms; or, applications with demand rates less than or equal to 3
demand per minute.
• Dual-channel mode uses two output signals, that is, data from two
output channels to provide redundant control.
• Safety outputs can be pulse-tested to detect field wiring short-circuits to
24V DC.

Safety Output with Test Pulse

When the safety output is on, the safety output can be configured to pulse test
the safety output channel. By using this function, you can continuously test the
ability of the safety output to remove power from the output terminals of the
module.

If an error is detected, the safety output data and individual safety output
status turn off.
Figure 25 - 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OBV8SK Test Pulse in a Cycle
Sourcing Output

On

OUT
Off
X Y

Sinking Output

X Y
Off
OUT

On

On the 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OBV8SK module, the pulse width (X) is less than
700 μs, and the pulse period (Y) is less than100 ms.
Tip

To help prevent the test pulse from causing the connected device to malfunction,
pay careful attention to the input response time of the output device.
An open wire test and internal short circuit test can generate a pulse on a safety
output even in safety mode. To completely remove pulse from safety output in
Safety Mode, open wire test and internal short circuit test could be configured.
Please see Table 28 on page 104 and Table 36 on page 109.
Two successive safety output pulses are required to determine if a short circuit fault
exists. As a result, the effective pulse period is 200 ms, maximum

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 139

Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Single-channel Mode
When the output channel is in the On state and without any faults, the safety
outputs turned on. The status is normal. If a fault is detected on the output
channel, the safety output data and individual safety output status turn off.

For information on how to use single-channel mode with a 5069-OBV8S or

5069-OBV8SK module affects the safety application suitability level, see
Table 48 on page 138.
Figure 26 - 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OBV8SK Single-channel Mode (Not to Scale)

ON
Output 0
OFF

Normal Operation

ON
Safety Network Data Sent Safety Output 0
to the Controller Status OFF

ON
Output 0
OFF

Fault Detection

Error Detected
ON
Safety Network Data Sent Safety Output 0
to the Controller Status OFF

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Dual-channel Mode
IMPORTANT Dual-channel mode is only available if the module is connected so that
Output Mode is Sourcing.

When dual-channel mode is used, output channels function as connection

pairs. Connection pairs are as follows:
• Channels 0 and 1
• Channels 2 and 3
• Channels 4 and 5
• Channels 6 and 7

When both output channels in a connection pair are in the On state and
without any faults, the safety outputs are turned on.

For information on how to use dual-channel mode with a 5069-OBV8S or

5069-OBV8SK module affects the safety application suitability level, see
Table 48 on page 138.
Figure 27 - 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OBV8SK Dual-channel Mode (Not to Scale)

ON
Output 0
OFF

Normal Operation ON
Output 1
OFF

Safety Network Data Sent ON

Safety Outputs 0
to the Controller and 1 Status OFF

ON
Output 0
Fault Detection OFF

ON
Output 1
OFF

Error Detected
Safety Network Data Sent Safety Outputs 0 ON
to the Controller and 1 Status
OFF

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 141

Chapter 5 Safety Module Features

Safety Output Fault Recovery

If a fault is detected, the safety outputs are switched off and remain in the off
state. Follow this procedure to activate the safety output data again.
1. Remove the cause of the error.
2. Command the safety output (or safety outputs) into the safe state.
The safety output (or outputs) can be commanded low in any of the
following ways:
• The controller sets the Ptxx.Data tag to 0.
• The module is reset.
• Power is cycled to the module.
• The controller transitions to Program mode.
• A controller or Safety task fault occurs.
• A communications fault occurs on the module.
• The connection to the module is inhibited.
3. Let the Output Error Latch Time elapse.
After the steps are completed, the I/O indicator (red) turns off. The
output data can now be controlled.
If module outputs experience persistent high faults, consider cycling power to the
module to clear the error.

IMPORTANT The module can require up to 1 second in addition to the Output Error
Latch Time to complete the recovery.

Fault and Status Reporting The Compact 5000 I/O safety modules multicast fault and status data with
channel data to the owner and listening controllers. The data is returned via
module tags that you can monitor in your Logix Designer application.

For more information on how to use module tags to monitor fault and status
reporting, see the following:
• 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module - Table 14 on page 82
• 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OBV8SK module - Table 43 on page 116
• Appendix A, Troubleshoot Your Module on page 201.

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6

Configure a Standard Module

Topic Page
Before You Begin 144
Create a New Module 144
Reserve an I/O Module Slot 152
Edit the Module Configuration Common Categories 154
Edit 5069-IA16 Module Configuration Categories 159
Edit 5069-IB16 Module Configuration Categories 160
Edit 5069-IB16F Module Configuration Categories 162
Edit 5069-IB6F-3W Module Configuration Categories 168
Edit 5069-OA16 Module Configuration Categories 174
Edit 5069-OB8 Module Configuration Categories 175
Edit 5069-OB16 Module Configuration Categories 176
Edit 5069-OB16F Module Configuration Categories 177
Edit 5069-OW4I Module Configuration Categories 178
Edit 5069-OW16 Module Configuration Categories 179
Edit 5069-OX4I Module Configuration Categories 180
View the Module Tags 181

This chapter describes how to configure your Compact 5000™ I/O standard
modules in a Logix Designer application project. You can use the default
module configuration or edit the module configuration.
This chapter does not explain the user-configurable module features that you
can edit on different screens in your Logix Designer application project.
For detailed information about module features, see the following:
• Chapter 2, Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules on
page 63
• Chapter 3, Input Module Features on page 75
• Chapter 4, Output Module Features on page 97
• Chapter 5, Safety Module Features on page 125

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 143

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Before You Begin You must complete the following tasks before you can configure the module:
1. Create a Logix Designer application project.
2. If you use the standard modules as remote modules, add a Compact 5000
I/O EtherNet/IP™ adapter to the project.
For more information on how to add a Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP
adapter to a Logix Designer application project, see the Compact 5000
EtherNet/IP Adapters User Manual, publication 5069-UM007.
Once the project is created and, if necessary, the adapter is added, you can
create a module in the Logix Designer application project.

Create a New Module There are two methods to add modules to your Logix Designer
application project.
• Discover I/O modules
• New I/O modules

Discover Local I/O Modules

To use the Discover Modules method with local I/O modules, complete the
following steps.
1. Go online with your Logix Designer application.
2. Right-click the 5069 Backplane and choose Discover Modules.
The Logix Designer application automatically detects available modules
that are connected to the backplane.

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

3. At the Select Module Type window, click Create to add the discovered
module to your project.

4. At the New Module window, configure the module properties and

click OK.

5. At the warning dialog box, click Yes.

If you inhibit the module connection, you must remember to uninhibit the connection
later.

6. Close the Select Module Type dialog box.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 145

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

To add additional local I/O modules with this method, complete one of the
following:
• If you cleared the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/
O module, repeat steps 3…6.
• If you did not clear the Close on Create checkbox when you created the
first I/O module, repeat steps 2…6.

New Local I/O Modules

To use the New Module method with local I/O modules, complete the
following steps.
This example shows how to add a local I/O module when the Logix Designer
application project is offline.
You can add new modules when the project is online, if desired. In this case, the
steps are similar to the steps described in Discover Local I/O Modules on page 144.
One exception is that, in step 1, you choose New Module instead of Discover Modules.
1. Right-click the 5069 Backplane and choose New Module.

2. At the Select Module Type window, click Create to add the discovered
module to your project.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

3. At the New Module window, configure the module properties and

click OK.

To add additional local I/O modules with this method, complete one of
the following:
• If you cleared the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/
O module, repeat steps 2…3.
• If you did not clear the Close on Create checkbox when you created the
first I/O module, repeat steps 1…3.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 147

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Discover Remote I/O Modules

To use the Discover Modules method with remote I/O modules, complete the
following steps.
1. Go online with your Logix Designer application.
The project must include a Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter.
2. Right-click the Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter and choose
Discover Modules.
The Logix Designer application automatically detects available modules
that are connected to the backplane.

3. At the Select Module Type window, click Create to add the discovered
module to your project.

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

4. At the New Module window, configure the module properties and

click OK.

5. At the warning dialog box, click Yes.

If you inhibit the module connection, you must remember to uninhibit the connection
later.

6. Close the Select Module Type dialog box.

To add additional remote I/O modules with this method, complete one of
the following:
• If you cleared the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/
O module, repeat steps 3…6.
• If you did not clear the Close on Create checkbox when you created the
first I/O module, repeat steps 2…6.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 149

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

New Remote I/O Module

To use the New Module method with remote I/O modules, complete the
following steps.
This example shows how to add a remote I/O module when the Logix Designer
application project is offline.
You can add new modules when the project is online, if desired. In this case, the
steps are similar to the steps described in Discover Remote I/O Modules on page 148.
One exception is that, in step 1, you choose New Module instead of Discover Modules.
1. Right-click the Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter and choose
New Module.

2. Select the module and click Create.

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

The New Module dialog box appears with a list of categories on the left
side. The number and type of categories varies by module type.
3. You can click OK to use the default configuration as shown or edit the
module configuration. The rest of this chapter describes how to edit
module configuration categories.

To add additional remote I/O modules with this method, complete one of
the following:
• If you cleared the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/
O module, repeat steps 2…3.
• If you did not clear the Close on Create checkbox when you created the
first I/O module, repeat steps 1…3.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 151

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Reserve an I/O Module Slot As described in page 29, the 5069-ARM address reserve module reserves a
module slot in the physical system and in the Logix Designer application
project that is configured for the system.

Add the 5069-ARM Module to the Project

You add a 5069-ARM module to the I/O Configuration section of a Logix
Designer application project. You can use the New I/O or Discover I/O
modules option to add the module. This example uses the New I/O
module option.
1. Right-click the 5069 Backplane and choose New Module.

2. At the Select Module Type window, click Create to add the discovered
module to your project.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

3. At the New Module window, configure the module properties and

click OK.
Because the 5069-ARM module is only used to reserve an I/O slot, there
are considerably fewer fields to configure than other Compact 5000 I/O
digital modules.

Delete the 5069-ARM Module from the Project

When you remove the 5069-ARM module from the system and install the
Compact 5000 I/O digital module that is intended for that node address, you
must also change the Logix Designer application project.
You must delete the 5069-ARM module from the project as follows.
1. Right-click the module name and choose Delete.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 153

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

2. To confirm the module deletion, click Yes on the dialog box that appears.

3. To add the Compact 5000 I/O digital module that uses the node address
that the 5069-ARM module reserved, follow the steps that are described
previously in this section.

Edit the Module You click the category names in the New Module dialog box to view and change
Configuration Common the configuration parameters. Before you edit the module configuration,
consider the following:
Categories • This chapter shows how to edit configuration when you add the module
to the Logix Designer application project.
If you access the module configuration after it is added to the project, the
dialog box is named Module Properties. The same categories are
displayed as the categories displayed on the New Module dialog box.
• Some new module configuration categories apply to all Compact 5000 I/
O digital modules. Some categories are specific to the module type.
For example purposes, the figures in this section are from a
5069-IB16 module.

The following categories apply to all Compact 5000 I/O standard modules and
are described in this section.
• General Category
• Connection Category
• Module Info Category

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

General Category
The General category appears first when you create a module. The parameters
in this category are the same for all Compact 5000 I/O digital modules.

You use this category to complete the following optional tasks:

• Name the module.
• Assign a slot number. (required)
• Describe the module.
• Access the Module Definition.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 155

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Module Definition

To change Module Definition parameters from the default values, click the
Change ellipsis on the General tab of the Module Properties dialog box.

Table 49 describes the parameters on the Module Definition dialog box.

IMPORTANT The graphic is an example of a Module Definition dialog box. The available fields
can vary between Compact 5000 I/O digital modules types.
For example, the 5069-IA16 input module does not support counters so the
Counters parameter is not available on the Module Definition dialog box for that
module.

Table 49 describes the parameters that are available on the Module Definition
dialog box.
Table 49 - Module Definition Parameters
Parameter Definition Available Choices(1)
Series Module hardware series Module-specific
Revision Module firmware revision, including major and minor revision levels Module-specific
Software method by which you reduce the possibility of using the wrong device in a control system. • Exact Match
For more information, see the following:
Electronic Keying • Compatible Module
• Electronic Keying on page 70
• Electronic Keying in Logix 5000™ Control Systems Application Technique, publication LOGIX-AT001 • Disable Keying
Determines the following for the module type you configure: • Data
• Available configuration parameters • Data with Events
Connection
• Data type transferred between the module and the controller
• Which tags are generated when configuration is complete • Listen Only Data(2)
• Data
All available configurations, input data. This connection type creates all controller tags specific to the module •
Input Data - Input modules only Timestamped Data
type being used.
• Packed Data
• None
• 2
Counters - Input modules only Determines the number of counters that are used for the module type.
• 4
• 8
• Data
Output Data - Output modules only All available configurations, output data. This connection type creates all controller tags specific to the • Scheduled Data
module type being used.
• Packed Data
(1) The choices that are available vary by module type and catalog number.
(2) Controller and module establish communication without the controller sending any configuration or output data to the module. A full input data connection is established but depends on the
connection between the owner-controller and the module.

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Connection Category
The Connection category lets you complete the following tasks:
• Set the RPI rate. For more information on the RPI, see Requested Packet
Interval on page 42.
• Set the Connection over the EtherNet/IP network type of connection.
• Inhibit the module. For more information on how to inhibit the module,
see page 69.
• Configure whether a connection failure while the controller is in Run
module causes a major or minor fault.
The Module Fault area of the Connection category is useful during module
troubleshooting. For more information on the Module Fault area, see page 215.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 157

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Module Info Category

The Module Info category displays module and status information about
the module when the project is online. You can use this category to complete
the following:
• Determine the identity of the module.
• Access module diagnostics.
• Refresh the data on the screen.
• Reset the module.

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-IA16 Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the Points
Configuration Categories category is available when you configure a 5069-IA16 module:

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points category does not appear.

Points Category
The Points category shows the available input filter time values for the
module points.

For more information on input filters, see page 77.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 159

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-IB16 Module To configure a 5069-IB16K module, you use the 5069-IB16 module profile in
Configuration Categories your Logix Designer application project.

In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the

following categories are available when you configure a 5069-IB16 module:
• Counters Category
• Points Category

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category and Counters
Category do not appear.

Counters Category
The Counters category is only available if you choose a value for Counters in
the Module Definition dialog box.

The Counters category shows the configuration options available for each
counter. You can also configure the counter Preset value and enable Rollover
at Preset.

IMPORTANT The total number of Counters subtracts from the available number of Points.
For example, if you configure a 5069-IB16 module to use four counters, the first
four terminals are not available to use as points.
The number of points available on the module in this case is 12. That is,
points 4…15.
The maximum number of counters that can be configured is eight channels.
That is, counters 0…7.

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Points Category
The Points category shows the available input filter time values for the
module points.

For more information on input filters, see page 77.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 161

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-IB16F Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the
Configuration Categories following categories are available when you configure a 5069-IB16F module:
• Counters Category
• Points Category
• Events Category
• Time Sync Category

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category, Counters Category,
Events Category, and Time Sync Category do not appear.

Counters Category
The Counters category is available only if you choose a value for Counters in
the Module Definition dialog box.

The Counters category shows the configuration options available for each
counter. Based on your Input Filter Time selections, the Input Filter Time
Off>On and On>Off times change. You can also configure the counter Preset
value and enable Rollover at Preset.

IMPORTANT The total number of Counters subtracts from the available number of
Points. For example, if you configure a 5069-IB16F module to use four
counters, the first four terminals are not available to use as points.
The number of points available on the module in this case is 12. That is,
points 4…15.
The maximum number of counters that can be configured is eight
channels. That is, counters 0…7.

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Points Category
The Points category shows the available input filter time values for the module points.

If you choose Timestamped Data for Input Data in the Module Definition
dialog box, the Points category expands.

For more information on input filters, see page 77.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 163

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

PTxx Category

The PTxx category shows the configuration options available when you use
Timestamping on a point.

IMPORTANT You must choose the Input Data option Timestamp Data on the Module
Definition dialog box to see this category in the Module Properties dialog
box.

Click each Ptxx to configure it as necessary for your application.

For more information on the fields on this screen, see the following:
• Input filters - page 77
• Timestamping - page 84

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Events Category
The Events category is available only if you choose Data with Events for
Connection in the Module Definition dialog box. Click the + sign next to the
Events category to expand it.

IMPORTANT You cannot configure events on the Module Properties dialog box. The
parameters that are displayed are read-only.
You must use the Event Output tags to configure an event. For more
information, see Configure an Event in the Event Output Tags on
page 166.

The Events subcategories show the configuration parameters for events.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 165

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Configure an Event in the Event Output Tags

To configure an event, you must change the Event Output tags for the affected
module via the Tag Monitor in the Logix Designer application. When you
change the tags, the change is reflected on the Module Properties dialog box.

The following graphics show how tag values are reflected on the Module
Properties. The following conditions are shown:
• Event is enabled
• Point 4 is configured to trigger the event
• Event is latched
• Trigger Event is on input transition to match pattern

These changes in the Event Output tags

configure the event.
After the tags are changed, the related
parameters on the Module Properties are
updated automatically.

For more information on module tags, see the following:

• View the Module Tags on page 181
• Appendix B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219
For more information on the Events feature, see page 86.

166 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Time Sync Category

The Time Sync category displays and status information about the
module when the project is online. The Time Sync category displays the
following information:
• CIP Sync Time Synchronization
• UTC System Time
• Grandmaster Clock information
• Local Clock information

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 167

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-IB6F-3W Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the
Configuration Categories following categories are available when you configure a 5069-IB6F-3W module:
• Points Category
• Counters Category
• Events Category
• Time Sync Category

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category, Counters
Category, Events Category, and Time Sync Category do not appear.

Counters Category
The Counters category is available only if you choose a value for Counters in
the Module Definition dialog box.

The Counters category for the 5069-IB6F-3W module functions the same as it
does for the other Compact 5000 I/O standard input modules. The only
difference is that the 5069-IB6F-3W module offers no more than four counters.

The Counters category shows the configuration options available for each
counter. You can also configure the counter Preset value and enable Rollover
at Preset.

IMPORTANT The total number of Counters subtracts from the available number of
Points. For example, if you configure a 5069-IB6F-3W module to use two
counters, the number of points available on the module is four. That is,
points 2…5.
The maximum number of counters that can be configured is four
channels. That is, counter 0…3.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Points Category
The Points category shows the available input filter time values for the
module points.

If you choose Timestamped Data for Input Data in the Module Definition
dialog box, the Points category expands.

For more information on input filters, see page 77.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 169

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

PTxx Category

The PTxx category shows the configuration options available when you use
Timestamping on a point.

IMPORTANT You must choose the Input Data option Timestamp Data on the
Module Definition dialog box to see this category in the Module
Properties dialog box.

Click each Ptxx to configure it as necessary for your application.

For more information on the fields on this screen, see the following:
• Input filters - page 77.
• Timestamping - page 84
• Chatter Detection - page 85

170 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Events Category
The Events category is available only if you choose Data with Events for
Connection in the Module Definition dialog box. Click the + sign next to the
Events category to expand it.

IMPORTANT You cannot configure events on the Module Properties dialog box. The
parameters that are displayed are read-only.
You must use the Event Output tags to configure an event. For more
information, see Configure an Event in the Event Output Tags on page 172.

The Events subcategories show the configuration parameters for events.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 171

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Configure an Event in the Event Output Tags

To configure an event, you must change the Event Output tags for the affected
module via the Tag Monitor in the Logix Designer application. When you
change the tags, the change is reflected on the Module Properties dialog box.

The following graphics show how tag values are reflected on the Module
Properties. The following conditions are shown:
• Event is enabled
• Point 4 is configured to trigger the event
• Event is latched
• Trigger Event is On input transition to match pattern

These changes in the Event Output

tags configure the event.
After the tags are changed, the
related parameters on the Module
Properties are updated
automatically.

For more information on module tags, see the following:

• View the Module Tags on page 181
• Appendix B, Module Tag Definitions on page 219.

For more information on the Events feature, see page 86.

172 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Time Sync Category

The Time Sync category displays and status information about the
module when the project is online. The Time Sync category displays the
following information:
• CIP Sync Time Synchronization
• UTC System Time
• Grandmaster Clock information
• Local Clock information

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 173

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-OA16 Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the Points
Configuration Categories category is available when you configure a 5069-OA16 module.

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category does
not appear.

Points Category
The Points category shows the configuration options available for each point.
You can configure the following parameters from the Points category:
• Output State During Program Mode
• Output State During Fault Mode
• Fault Mode Output State Duration
• Fault Mode Output State Final State
• Output State When Communications Fail in Program Mode

174 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-OB8 Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the Points
Configuration Categories category is available when you configure a 5069-OB8 module.

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category does
not appear.

Points Category
The Points category shows the configuration options available for each point.
You can configure the following parameters from the Points category:
• Output State During Program Mode
• Output State During Fault Mode
• Fault Mode Output State Duration
• Fault Mode Output State Final State
• Output State When Communications Fail in Program Mode
• Enable No Load Diagnostics

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 175

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-OB16 Module To configure a 5069-OB16K module, you use the 5069-OB16 module profile in
Configuration Categories your Logix Designer application project.

In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the Points
category is available when you configure a 5069-OB16 module.

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category does
not appear.

Points Category
The Points category shows the configuration options available for each point.
You can configure the following parameters from the Points category:
• Output State During Program Mode
• Output State During Fault Mode
• Fault Mode Output State Duration
• Fault Mode Output State Final State
• Output State When Communications Fail in Program Mode
• Enable No Load Diagnostics

176 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-OB16F Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the Points
Configuration Categories category is available when you configure a 5069-OB16F module.

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category does not
appear.

Points Category
The Points category shows the configuration options available for each point.
You can configure the following parameters from the Points category:
• Output State During Program Mode
• Output State During Fault Mode
• Fault Mode Output State Duration
• Fault Mode Output State Final State
• Output State When Communications Fail in Program Mode
• Enable No Load Diagnostics

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 177

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-OW4I Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the Points
Configuration Categories category is available when you configure a 5069-OW4I module.

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category does
not appear.

Points Category
The Points category shows the configuration options available for each point.
You can configure the following parameters from the Points category:
• Output State During Program Mode
• Output State During Fault Mode
• Fault Mode Output State Duration
• Fault Mode Output State Final State
• Output State When Communications Fail in Program Mode

178 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-OW16 Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the Points
Configuration Categories category is available when you configure a 5069-OW16 module.

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category does
not appear.

Points Category
The Points category shows the configuration options available for each point.
You can configure the following parameters from the Points category:
• Output State During Program Mode
• Output State During Fault Mode
• Fault Mode Output State Duration
• Fault Mode Output State Final State
• Output State When Communications Fail in Program Mode

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 179

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Edit 5069-OX4I Module In addition to the General, Connection, and Module Info categories, the Points
Configuration Categories category is available when you configure a 5069-OX4I module.

IMPORTANT If you use the Listen Only connection type, the Points Category does
not appear.

Points Category
The Points category shows the configuration options available for each point.
You can configure the following parameters from the Points category:
• Output State During Program Mode
• Output State During Fault Mode
• Fault Mode Output State Duration
• Fault Mode Output State Final State
• Communication Failure Output State

180 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

View the Module Tags When you create a module, the Logix Designer application creates a set of tags
that you can view in the Tag Editor. Each configured feature on your module
has a distinct tag that is available for use in the controller program logic.

Complete the following steps to access the tags for a module.

1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click Controller Tags and choose
Monitor Tags.

The Controller Tags dialog box appears with data.

2. To view the tags, click the + symbols as shown.

For more information on module tags, see Appendix B, Module Tag

Definitions on page 219.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 181

Chapter 6 Configure a Standard Module

Notes:

182 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 7

Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Topic Page
Before You Begin 183
Create a New Module 184
Edit the Module Configuration Common Categories 187
Edit the 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK Module Configuration Categories 193
Edit the 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Module Points Category 194
View the Module Tags 195
Replace a Safety Module 196

This chapter describes how to configure your Compact 5000™ I/O safety
modules in a Logix Designer application project.

IMPORTANT You must use the Logix Designer application, version 32 or greater with
the modules.
By default, all safety input and output channels on Compact 5000 I/O
safety modules are disabled. You must configure each point that is used
in a Safety application.

This chapter does not explain the user-configurable parameters, or

corresponding module features, in your Logix Designer application project.

For detailed information about module features, see the following:

• Chapter 2, Features Common to Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules on
page 63
• Chapter 3, Input Module Features on page 75
• Chapter 4, Output Module Features on page 97
• Chapter 5, Safety Module Features on page 125

Before You Begin You must complete the following tasks before you can configure the module:
1. Create a Logix Designer application project.
2. If you use the safety modules as remote I/O modules, add a
Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP™ adapter to the project.
For more information on how to add a Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP
adapter to a Logix Designer application project, see the Compact 5000
EtherNet/IP Adapters User Manual, publication 5069-UM007.

Once the project is created and, if necessary, the adapter is added, you can
create a module in the Logix Designer application project.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 183

Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Create a New Module Unlike Compact 5000 I/O standard modules, you cannot add a Compact 5000
I/O safety module to a Logix Designer application project while the project is
online. The project must be offline to add Compact 5000 I/O safety modules
to it.
You can create a new local or remote Compact 5000 I/O safety module.
Local I/O modules are installed in the same system as the Compact
GuardLogix® 5380 controllers. Remote I/O modules are installed in a
system that includes a Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter that connects
to an EtherNet/IP network.

New Local Safety Module

To create a new local Compact 5000 I/O safety module, complete the
following steps.
1. Right-click the 5069 Backplane and choose New Module.

2. At the Select Module Type window, click Create to add the discovered
module to your project.

184 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

3. At the New Module window, configure the module properties and

click OK.

To add additional local I/O modules with this method, complete one of
the following:
• If you cleared the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/
O module, repeat steps 2…3.
• If you did not clear the Close on Create checkbox when you created the
first I/O module, repeat steps 1…3.

New Remote I/O Module

To create a new remote Compact 5000 I/O safety module, complete the
following steps.
1. Add a Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter to the project.
2. Right-click the Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter and choose
New Module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 185

Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

3. Select the module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears with a list of categories on the left
side. The number and type of categories varies by module type.
4. You can click OK to use the default configuration as shown or edit the
module configuration. The rest of this chapter describes how to edit
module configuration categories.

To add additional remote I/O modules with this method, complete one of
the following:
• If you cleared the Close on Create checkbox when you created the first I/
O module, repeat steps 3…4.
• If you did not clear the Close on Create checkbox when you created the
first I/O module, repeat steps 2…4.

186 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Edit the Module You click the category names in the New Module dialog box to view and change
Configuration Common the configuration parameters. Before you edit the module configuration,
consider the following:
Categories • This chapter shows how to edit configuration when you add the module
to the Logix Designer application project.
If you access the module configuration after it is added to the project, the
dialog box is named Module Properties. The same categories are
displayed as the categories displayed on the New Module dialog box.
• Some new module configuration categories apply to all Compact 5000 I/
O safety modules. Some categories are specific to the module type.

IMPORTANT By default, all safety input and output channels on Compact 5000 I/O safety
modules are disabled.
You must configure each point that is used in a Safety application.

The following categories apply to all Compact 5000 I/O safety modules and are
described in this section.
• General Category
• Connection Category
• Safety Category
• Module Info Category

General Category
The General category appears first when you create a module. The parameters
in this category are the same for all Compact 5000 I/O safety modules.
You use this category to complete the following tasks:
• Name the module.
• Assign a node number.
• Describe the module.
• Access the Module Definition.

Safety Network Number

The Logix Designer application automatically assigns an SNN to Compact

5000 I/O safety modules as they are added to the project.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 187

Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

The SNN is a time-based number that uniquely identifies subnets across all
networks in the safety system. All Compact 5000 I/O safety modules in a same
system use the same SNN by default.
• Local Compact 5000 I/O safety modules are automatically assigned the
same SNN as the 5069 Backplane SSN in the controller configuration.
• Remote Compact 5000 I/O safety modules are automatically assigned the
same SNN.
The Logix Designer application assigns an SNN to the first safety module
that is added to a remote system. The application assigns the same SNN
to additional safety modules that are added to this remote
I/O system.

For more information on Safety Network Numbers, see the GuardLogix 5580
and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller Systems Safety Reference Manual,
publication 1756-RM012.

188 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Module Definition
Module Definition parameters are available on the General tab of the Module
Properties dialog box in the Logix Designer application project.

Table 50 describes the parameters on the Module Definition dialog box.

5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK Modules 5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK Modules

Table 50 describes the parameters that are available on the Module Definition
dialog box.
Table 50 - Module Definition Parameters
Parameter Definition Available Choices
Series Module hardware series Module-specific
Revision Module firmware revision, including major and minor revision levels Module-specific
• Exact Match
Software method by which you reduce the possibility of using the wrong device in a control system.
For more information, see the following: • Compatible Module
Electronic Keying • Electronic Keying on page 70 • Disable Keying
• Electronic Keying in Logix 5000™ Control Systems Application Technique, We strongly recommend that you
publication LOGIX-AT001 use Exact Match or Compatible
Module in Safety applications.
Determines the following for the module type you configure:
• Which controller tags are generated when configuration is complete • This Controller
Configured By • Whether you can choose an Output Data type - Output module only
• Whether you can choose an Output Mode - Output module only • External Means(1)
• Whether muting lamp points can be used - Input module only
Determines what type of input data is exchanged between the module and the controller.
Creates all controller tags specific to the module type being used. • Safety data
Input Data IMPORTANT: The 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK output modules exchange input data with • Safety packed data
the controller.
• None
Muting Lamp Points - 5069-IB8S • Point 02
Determines which input channels, if any, are connected to muting lamps.
or 5069-IB8SK module only • Point 03
• Point 02 and 03
• None - If Configured By is External
Means.
Output Data - 5069-OBV8S or Determines what type of output data is exchanged between the module and the controller.
5069-OBV8SK module only The available choices are dictated by the Configured By parameter choice. • Safety data and Safety packed
data - If Configured By is This
Controller.
Determines how the outputs are used. That is, one of the following:
• Sourcing outputs. In this case, you connect the external device to only the sourcing point on an • Sourcing
Output Mode - 5069-OBV8S or output channel.
5069-OBV8SK module only • Bipolar
• As connection pairs. In this case, you connect the external device to both the sourcing and sinking
points on an output channel.
(1) Controller and module establish communication without the controller sending any configuration or output data to the module. A full input data connection is established but depends on the
connection between the owner-controller and the module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 189

Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Connection Category
The Connection category lets you inhibit the module.

Before you inhibit the module, make sure that you are aware of the impact it
has on your application. For more information on inhibiting the module, see
page 69.

IMPORTANT You cannot set the RPI for Compact 5000 I/O safety modules on the
Connections category. For Compact 5000 I/O safety modules, you set
the RPI on the Safety category.

Connection Over the EtherNet/IP Network

Remote Compact 5000 I/O safety modules support the Connection over
EtherNet/IP parameter.
• With safety input data, you can choose Unicast or Multicast.
• With safety output data, you must use Unicast.

For more information, see page 50.

190 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Safety Category
The Safety category lets you set the RPI rate. You must click the Advanced
button to change the Connection Reaction Time Limit configuration.

IMPORTANT Remember, the Safety Task period determines the 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OBV8SK
module RPI.

For more information on the RPI and the Connection Reaction Time Limit
parameters, see Requested Packet Interval on page 42.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 191

Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Module Info Category

The Module Info category displays module and status information about
the module when the project is online. You can use this category to complete
the following:
• Determine the identity of the module.
• Access module diagnostics.
• Refresh the data on the screen.
• Reset the module.

192 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Edit the 5069-IB8S and The following categories are available when you configure a 5069-IB8S or 5069-
5069-IB8SK Module IB8SK module:
• Input Points Category
Configuration Categories • Test Output Points Category

Input Points Category

The Input Points category is only available if you choose This Controller for the
Configured By parameter on the Module Definition dialog box.

You must configure each point to use it in a Safety application. The inputs are
disabled by default.

IMPORTANT The Logix Designer application project limits the number of Safety Pulse
tests to which you can map a test source.
For example, you can map Test Source 0 to a maximum of two Safety Pulse
tests. If you try to exceed the maximum number, the software helps prevent
the configuration and a message similar to the following appears.

For more information on input delay times, see page 77.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 193

Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Test Output Points Category

The Test Output Points category is only available if you choose This Controller
for the Configured By parameter on the Module Definition dialog box.

You must configure each point to use it in a Safety application. The outputs are
disabled by default.

Edit the 5069-OBV8S and The 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules use the Points category.
5069-OBV8SK Module The Points category is only available if you choose This Controller for the
Points Category Configured By parameter on the Module Definition dialog box.

You must configure each point to use it in a Safety application. The outputs are
disabled by default.
Figure 28 - Configure Points

194 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

View the Module Tags When you create a module, the Logix Designer application creates a set of tags
that you can view in the Tag Editor. Each configured feature on your module
has a distinct tag that is available for use in the controller program logic.

Complete the following steps to access the tags for a module.

1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click Controller Tags and choose
Monitor Tags.

The Controller Tags dialog box appears with data.

2. To view the tags, click the triangle symbols.

For more information on module tags, see Appendix B,

Module Tag Definitions on page 219

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 195

Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Replace a Safety Module Replacing a safety module that sits on a CIP Safety™ network is more
complicated than replacing standard devices because of the Safety Network
Number (SNN).

Safety devices require this more complex identifier to make sure that
module numbers that are duplicated on separate subnets across all networks
in the application do not compromise communication between the correct
safety devices.

The SNN is a unique identifier that is automatically assigned to each subnet in

a safety application. The same SNN is assigned to all devices on the subnet.

For example, when a Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP adapter is used in a safety
application, the Logix Designer application project assigns it an SNN. All
Compact 5000 I/O digital modules that are installed with that adapter, are
automatically assigned the same SNN.

However, each Compact 5000 I/O safety modules require a unique identifier
within the same subnet. A DeviceID is used to uniquely identify each safety
module. The SNN and module slot number constitute the DeviceID of the
safety module.

Set the SNN Manually

The SNN is used to provide integrity on the initial download to a
Compact 5000 I/O safety module.
If a safety signature exists, the Compact 5000 I/O safety module must have
DeviceID that matches the module in the safety controller project, before it can
receive its configuration.

To maintain integrity, the module SNN must be set manually.

1. On the General category of the Module Properties dialog box, click the
ellipsis next to the Safety Network Number.

196 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

2. On the Safety Network Number dialog box, click Manual.

3. Type the SNN in the Number field and click OK.

4. On the Module Properties dialog box, click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 197

Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Reset to Out-of-Box Configuration

When the Logix Designer application is online, the Safety tab of the Module
Properties dialog box displays the current configuration ownership. When the
opened project owns the configuration, Local is displayed.

When a second device owns the configuration, Remote is displayed, along with
the SNN, and node address or slot number of the configuration owner.
Communication error is displayed if the module read fails.

If the connection is Local, you must inhibit the module connection before you
reset ownership. To inhibit the module:
1. Right-click the module and choose Properties.
2. On the Connection tab, click Inhibit module.
3. Click Apply and then OK.
Complete the following steps to reset the module to its out-of-box
configuration when online.
1. Right-click the module and choose Properties.
2. On the Safety tab, click Reset Ownership.

3. When a dialog box appears asking if you want to continue with the reset,
read it and click Yes.

198 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Replace a Module in a Logix 5000 System

Consider the following conditions before you replace a Compact 5000 I/O
safety module in a Logix 5000 system:
• If you rely on a portion of the CIP Safety system to maintain SIL 3
behavior during module replacement and functional testing, you must
use the Configure Only When No Safety Signature Exists feature.
• If you rely on the entire routable CIP Safety control system to maintain
SIL 3/PL (d or e) during the replacement and functional testing of a
module, you can use the Configure Always feature.

Replacement with `Configure Only When No Safety Signature Exists’ Enabled

When a module is replaced, the configuration is downloaded from the safety

controller if the DeviceID of the new module matches the original. The
DeviceID is updated whenever the SNN is set.

If the project is configured with Configure Only When No Safety Signature

Exists enabled, follow the appropriate instructions in to replace a Compact
5000 I/O safety module.

After you complete the steps in a scenario correctly, the DeviceID matches the
original. This match enables the safety controller to download the proper
module configuration, and re-establish the safety connection.
Table 51 - Replace a Compact 5000 I/O Safety Module
Controller Safety Signature Exists Replacement Module Condition Action Required
No No SNN (Out-of-box) None. The module is ready for use.
Yes or No Same SNN as original safety task configuration None. The module is ready for use.
Yes No SNN (Out-of-box) Complete the steps in Set the SNN Manually on page 196.
Yes
Different SNN from original safety task configuration
No

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 199

Chapter 7 Configure and Replace Safety Modules

Replacement with ‘Configured Always’ Enabled

ATTENTION: Enable the ‘Configure Always’ feature only if the entire CIP
Safety Control System is not being relied on to maintain SIL 3 behavior
during the replacement and functional testing of a module.
Do not place modules that are in the out-of-box condition on a CIP
Safety network when the Configure Always feature is enabled, except
while following this replacement procedure.

When the ‘Configure Always’ feature is enabled, the controller automatically

checks for and connects to a replacement module that meets all of the
following requirements:
• The controller has configuration data for a compatible module at that
network address.
• The module is in out-of-box condition or has an SNN that matches the
configuration.

If the project is configured for ‘Configure Always’, follow the appropriate steps
to replace a Compact 5000 I/O safety module.
1. Remove the old I/O module and install the new module.
If Then
go to step 6.
the module is in out-of-box condition No action is needed for the controller to take ownership of the module.
an SNN mismatch error occurs go to the next step to reset the module to out-of-box condition.

2. Right-click your I/O module and choose Properties.

3. Click the Safety tab.
4. Click Reset Ownership.
5. Click OK.
6. Follow your company-prescribed procedures to functionally test the
replaced I/O module and system and to authorize the system for use.

200 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix A

Troubleshoot Your Module

Topic Page
Module Status Indicator 202
Compact 5000 I/O Standard Input Modules Status Indicators 203
Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output Modules Status Indicators 205
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module Status Indicators 209
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module Status Indicators 211
Use the Logix Designer Application for Troubleshooting 213
Internal Fault Triggered on the Safety Output Module 218

Compact 5000™ I/O modules use the following status indicators:

• Module (MOD) Status Indicator - This indicator operates the same for all
Compact 5000 I/O digital modules.
• I/O Status Indicator - This indicator operates differently based on the
module type.
• SA Status Indicator- This indicator is only available on the Compact 5000
I/O safety modules.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 201

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Module Status Indicator Table 52 describes the Module (MOD) Status indicator on Compact 5000 I/O
Standard Modules digital modules.
Table 52 - Module Status Indicator - Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules
Indicator Description Recommended Action
State
None if your application does not use the module
If your application uses the module and it is
Off The module is not powered. expected to be operating, complete the following:
• Confirm that the system is powered.
• Confirm that the module is installed properly.
The module has a connection to the owner-
Steady green None
controller and is operating normally.
One of the following:
• The module does not have a connection to the
controller. A connection can result from missing, Troubleshoot your Logix Designer application to
Flashing green incomplete, or incorrect module configuration. determine what is helping help prevent a
• Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules only - A connection from the module to the controller and
connection can be established with the correct the issue.
controller, but the Validator has not completed
an initial Time Coordination exchange.
Complete the following actions:
Steady red The module experienced a nonrecoverable fault. 1. Cycle power to the module.
2. If the status indicator remains in the steady red
state, replace the module.
Safety Modules
Complete one of the following:
• Let the firmware update progress complete.
• Reattempt a firmware update after one fails.
• Use the Logix Designer application to determine
the cause of the module fault.
The Connection and Module Info categories of the
modules configuration indicate the fault type.
To clear a recoverable fault, complete one of
the following:
One of the following conditions exists: – Cycle module power.
• A module firmware update is in progress. – Click Reset Module in the Logix Designer
Flashing red • A module firmware update attempt failed. application project via the Module Info
category of the Module Properties dialog box.
• The device has experienced a recoverable fault.
• A connection to the module has timed out. If the fault does not clear after you cycle power
and click Reset Module, contact Rockwell
Automation® Technical Support.
• Use the Logix Designer application to determine
if a connection has timed out. The Connection
category in the Module Properties for the
module indicates the module state, including if a
connection has timed out.
If a connection has timed out, determine the cause
and correct it. For example, a cable failure can
cause a connection timeout.
Updating red/ Compact 5000 I/O Safety Modules only - The UNID Commission the UNID in the module.
green needs to be commissioned in the module.

202 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Compact 5000 I/O Figure 29 shows the Compact 5000 I/O standard AC input module
Standard Input Modules status indicators.

Status Indicators Figure 29 - Compact 5000 I/O Standard AC Input Module I/O Status Indicators

Standard Modules 5069-IA16

Module Status indicator

Input Channel 0 (I00)

Input Channel 1 (I01)
Input Channel 2 (I02)
Input Channel 3 (I03)
Input Channel 4 (I04)
Input Channel 5 (I05)
Input Channel 6 (I06)
Input Channel 7 (I07)
Input Channel 8 (I08) I/O Status Indicators
Input Channel 9 (I09)
Input Channel 10 (I10)
Input Channel 11 (I11)
Input Channel 12 (I12)
Input Channel 13 (I13)
Input Channel 14 (I14)
Input Channel 15 (I15)
No Connect
No Connect

Table 53 describes the Compact 5000 I/O standard AC input module I/O
status indicators.
Table 53 - I/O Status Indicators - Compact 5000 I/O Standard AC Input Module
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Off Input is Off or no module power applied None
Steady yellow The input is On. None

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 203

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Figure 30 shows the Compact 5000 I/O standard DC input modules

status indicators.
Figure 30 - Compact 5000 I/O Standard DC Input Module Status Indicators
5069-IB16, 5069-IB16F, 5069-IB16K 5069-IB6F-3W

Module Status Module Status

Indicator Indicator

Input Channel 0 (I00) Input Channel 0 (I00)

Input Channel 1 (I01) SA+ (24V DC)
Input Channel 2 (I02) SA- (24V DC Return)
Input Channel 3 (I03) Input Channel 1 (I01)
Input Channel 4 (I04) SA+ (24V DC)
Input Channel 5 (I05) SA- (24V DC Return)
Input Channel 6 (I06) Input Channel 2 (I02)
Input Channel 7 (I07) SA+ (24V DC)
I/O Status I/O Status
Input Channel 8 (I08) SA- (24V DC Return)
Indicators Indicators
Input Channel 9 (I09) Input Channel 3 (I03)
Input Channel 10 (I10) SA+ (24V DC)
Input Channel 11 (I11) SA- (24V DC Return)
Input Channel 12 (I12) Input Channel 4(I04)
Input Channel 13 (I13) SA+ (24V DC)
Input Channel 14 (I14) SA- (24V DC Return)
Input Channel 15 (I15) Input Channel 5 (I05)
No Connect SA+ (24V DC)
No Connect SA- (24V DC Return)

IMPORTANT: The 5069-IB16F and 5069-IB16K module status indicators appear

the same as the indicators are shown on the 5069-IB16 module.

Table 54 describes the Compact 5000 I/O standard DC input modules I/O
status indicators.
Table 54 - I/O Status Indicators - Compact 5000 I/O Standard DC Input Modules
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Off The input is Off, or no module power applied None
Steady yellow The input is On. None

204 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Compact 5000 I/O Figure 31 shows the status indicators on the Compact 5000 I/O standard AC
Standard Output output module.

Modules Status Indicators Figure 31 - Compact 5000 I/O Standard AC Output Modules Status Indicators

Standard Modules 5069-OA16

Module Status
Indicator

Output Channel 0 (O00)

Output Channel 1 (O01)
Output Channel 2 (O02)
Output Channel 3 (O03)
Output Channel 4 (O04)
Output Channel 5 (O05)
Output Channel 6 (O06)
Output Channel 7 (O07)
Output Channel 8 (O08) I/O Status Indicators
Output Channel 9 (O09)
Output Channel 10 (O10)
Output Channel 11 (O11)
Output Channel 12 (O12)
Output Channel 13 (O13)
Output Channel 14 (O14)
Output Channel 15 (O15)
No Connect
No Connect

Table 55 describes the I/O status indicators on Compact 5000 I/O standard AC
output modules.
Table 55 - I/O Status Indicators - Compact 5000 I/O Standard AC Output Module
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Off Output is Off, or no module power applied. None
Steady yellow The output is On. None
Flashing red A Field Power Loss detection condition exists. Reconnect power to the input.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 205

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Figure 32 show the status indicators on the Compact 5000 I/O standard DC
output modules.
Figure 32 - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Output DC Modules Status Indicators

5069-OB8 5069-OB16, 5069-OB16F, 5069-OB16K

Module Status Module Status

Indicator Indicator

Output Channel 0 (O00) Output Channel 0 (O00)

Output Channel 1 (O01) Output Channel 1 (O01)
Output Channel 2 (O02) Output Channel 2 (O02)
Output Channel 3 (O03) Output Channel 3 (O03)
LAO- Output Channel 4 (O04)
LAO- Output Channel 5 (O05)
LAO- Output Channel 6 (O06)
LAO- Output Channel 7 (O07)
LAO+ I/O Status Output Channel 8 (O08) I/O Status
Output Channel 4 (O04) Indicators Output Channel 9 (O09) Indicators
Output Channel 5 (O05) Output Channel 10 (O10)
Output Channel 6 (O06) Output Channel 11 (O11)
Output Channel 7 (O07) Output Channel 12 (O12)
LA1- Output Channel 13 (O13)
LA1- Output Channel 14 (O14)
LA1- Output Channel 15 (O15)
LA1- LA+
LA1+ LA-

IMPORTANT: The 5069-OB16F and 5069-OB16K module status indicators

appear the same as the indicators are shown on the 5069-OB16 module.

Table 56 describes the I/O status indicators on Compact 5000 I/O standard DC
output modules.
Table 56 - I/O Status Indicators - Compact 5000 I/O Standard DC Output Modules
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Off Output is Off, or no module power applied None
Steady yellow The output is On. None
One of the following: One of the following:
• A No Load or Short Circuit condition exists. • Locate and correct the no load or short
Flashing red • 5069-OB8, 5069-OB16/B, 5069-OB16F/B, circuit condition.
5069-OB16K/B - A Field Power Loss • Locate and correct the cause of field power
condition exists. loss condition.

206 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Figure 33 - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Relay Output Module Status Indicators
5069-OW4I 5069-OW16

Module Status Module Status

Indicator Indicator

Output Channel 0 (O00) 0A Output Channel 0 (O00)

0B Output Channel 1 (O01)
Output Channel 1 (O01) 1A Output Channel 2 (O02)
1B I/O Status Output Channel 3 (O03)
Output Channel 2 (O02) Indicators Output Channel 4 (O04)
2A
2B Output Channel 5 (O05)
Output Channel 3 (O03) 3A Output Channel 6 (O06)
3B Output Channel 7 (O07)
Common 0 I/O Status
Output Channel 8 (O08) Indicators
Output Channel 9 (O09)
Output Channel 10 (O10)
Output Channel 11 (O11)
Terminals
are unused Output Channel 12 (O12)
Output Channel 13 (O13)
Output Channel 14 (O14)
Output Channel 15 (O15)
Common 1

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 207

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

5069-OX4I

Module Status
Indicator

(0 N.C.)
(0 N.O.)
(O COMMON)
(1 N.C.)
(1 N.O.) I/O Status Indicators
(1 COMMON)
(2 N.C.)
(2 N.O.)
(2 COMMON)
(3 N.C.)
(3 N.O.)
(3 COMMON)

Terminals
are unused

Table 57 describes the I/O status indicators on Compact 5000 I/O standard
relay output modules.
Table 57 - I/O Status Indicators - Compact 5000 I/O Standard Relay Output Modules
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
Off Output is Off, or no module power applied None
Steady yellow The output is On. None
5069-OW16 only - A Field Power Loss condition Locate and correct the cause of field power
Flashing red exists. loss condition.

208 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Compact 5000 I/O Safety Figure 34 shows the Compact 5000 I/O safety input module status indicators.
Input Module Figure 34 - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module Status Indicators
Status Indicators 5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK
Safety Modules

Module Status Indicator

SA Status Indicator

Safety Input 0 (I00)

Safety Input 1 (I01)
Safety Input 2 (I02)
Safety Input 3 (I03)
Safety Input 4 (I04)
Safety Input 5 (I05)
Safety Input 6 (I06)
I/O Status
Safety Input 7 (I07) Indicators
Test Output 0 (TO0)
Test Output 0 (TO0)
Test Output 1 (TO1)
Test Output 1 (TO1)
Test Output/Muting Output 2 (TO2M)
Test Output/Muting Output 2 (T02M)
Test Output/Muting Output 3 (T03M)
Test Output/Muting Output 3 (T03M)
COM
COM

IMPORTANT: The 5069-IB8SK module status indicators appear the same as the
indicators are shown on the 5069-IB8S module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 209

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

SA Status Indicator
Table 58 describes the Compact 5000 I/O safety input module SA
status indicator.
Table 58 - SA Status Indicator - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
One of the following:
• There is no SA power that is applied to the
module.
• The status of SA power is unknown. Check the power source and address any
Off • The SA power is below valid range as issues.
defined by the module. That is, the power is
too low.
• During a safety critical fault, SA power was
turned off.
SA power is in a valid range as defined by the
Steady green None
module.
The SA power is outside the valid range as Diagnose and remedy the cause of the power
Steady red defined by the module. In this case, the power being outside the valid range.
can be off, too low, or too high.

I/O Status Indicators

Table 59 describes the Compact 5000 I/O safety input module I/O
status indicators.
Table 59 - I/O Status Indicators - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
One of the following:
• The channel is Off. The action is based on the cause of the
indicator being in the Off state. For example, if
Off • The channel is not configured. the channel is expected to be Off, there is no
• The channel is not enabled. action to take.
• There is no module power applied.
Steady yellow The channel is On. None
Flashing red Short Circuit condition exists. Locate and address the condition.
One of the following:
One of the following: • If a Field Power Loss, Overload, or Short
Circuit to Ground condition exists, check the
• Field Power Loss condition exists. module wiring and correct any issues.
• Overload condition exists on test output. • If there is not a Field Power Loss, Overload,
Steady red • Short Circuit to Ground condition exists on a or Short Circuit to Ground condition present,
test output. cycle module power.
• Other hardware fault not previously listed If the status indicator remains in the steady
occurred on the module. red state after you cycle power, replace the
module.

210 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Compact 5000 I/O Safety Figure 35 show the status indicators on the Compact 5000 I/O safety
Output Module Status output module.

Indicators Figure 35 - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module Status Indicators
Safety Modules
5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK

Module Status Indicator

SA Status Indicator

Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing)

Safety Output 0 N (Sinking)
Safety Output 1 P (Sourcing)
Safety Output 1 N (Sinking)
Safety Output 2 P (Sourcing)
Safety Output 2 N (Sinking)
Safety Output 3 P (Sourcing)
I/O Status
Safety Output 3 N (Sinking) Indicators
Safety Output 4 P (Sourcing)
Safety Output 4 N (Sinking)
Safety Output 5 P (Sourcing)
Safety Output 5 N (Sinking)
Safety Output 6 P (Sourcing)
Safety Output 6 N (Sinking)
Safety Output 7 P (Sourcing)
Safety Output 7 N (Sinking)
LA +
LA –

IMPORTANT: The 5069-OBV8SK module status indicators appear the same as the
indicators are shown on the 5069-OBV8S module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 211

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

SA Status Indicator
Table 60 describes the Compact 5000 I/O safety output module SA
status indicator.
Table 60 - SA Status Indicator - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
One of the following:
• There is no power SA power that is applied
to the module.
• The status of SA power is unknown. Check the power source and remedy any
Off • The SA power is below valid range as issues.
defined by the module. That is, the power is
too low.
• During a safety critical fault, SA power was
turned off.
SA power is in a valid range as defined by the
Steady green None
module.
The SA power is outside the valid range as Diagnose and remedy the cause of the power
Steady red defined by the module. In this case, the power being outside the valid range.
can be off, too low, or too high.

I/O Status Indicators

Table 61 describes the I/O status indicators on Compact 5000 I/O safety
output modules.
Table 61 - I/O Status Indicators - Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Modules
Indicator State Description Recommended Action
One of the following:
• The channel is Off. The action is based on the cause of the indicator
Off • The channel is not configured. being in the Off state. For example, if the channel is
• The channel is not enabled. expected to be Off, there is no action to take.
• There is no module power applied.
Steady yellow The output is On. None
One of the following:
• If the output is off and a No Load
Flashing red Locate and address the condition.
condition is detected.
• A Short Circuit condition exists.
One of the following:
One of the following: • If a Field Power Loss, Overload, or Short Circuit
• Field Power Loss condition exists. to Ground condition exists, check the module
• Overload condition exists on output. wiring and correct any issues.
Steady red • Short Circuit to Ground condition exists • If there is not a Field Power Loss, Overload, or
on an output. Short Circuit to Ground condition present, cycle
• Other hardware fault not previously listed module power.
occurred on the module. If the status indicator remains in the steady red
state after you cycle power, replace the module.
The output is off and a No Load condition is
detected, but the condition is not corrected
Flashing red/yellow and the output turns on. Assess and correct the condition.
In this case, the status indicator is flashing
red until the output is turned on.

212 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Use the Logix Designer The Logix Designer application indicates the presence of fault conditions.
Application for Fault conditions are reported in the following ways:
Troubleshooting • Warning Signal in the I/O Configuration Tree
Standard Modules • Status and Fault Information in Module Properties Categories
• Logix Designer Application Tag Editor

Warning Signal in the I/O Configuration Tree

As shown in Figure 36, a warning icon appears in the I/O Configuration tree
when a fault occurs.
Figure 36 - Warning Icon in Controller Organizer

Safety Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 213

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Status and Fault Information in Module Properties Categories

The Module Properties section in the Logix Designer application includes
a series of categories. The numbers and types of categories varies by
module type.

Each category includes options to configure the module or monitor the

status of the module. The following are ways to monitor the state of a module
for faults:
• Module Status on General Category
• Module Fault Descriptions on Connection Category
• Module Fault Descriptions on Module Info Category

Module Status on General Category

As shown in Figure 37, the status of a module is indicated on the General

category of the Modules Properties.
Figure 37 - Fault Message in Status Line

214 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Module Fault Descriptions on Connection Category

As shown in Figure 38, a module fault description that includes an

error code that is associated with the specific fault type is listed on the
Connection category.
Figure 38 - Fault Description with Error Code

Module Fault Descriptions on Module Info Category

As shown in Figure 39, major and minor fault information is listed on the
Module Info tab in the Status section.
Figure 39 - Major and Minor Fault Information

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 215

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Module and Point Diagnostics

You can use diagnostics in a Logix Designer application project to monitor
module and/or point operating conditions and to troubleshoot issues that
affect a module and/or point. You can only use diagnostics when the project
is online.
• Module Diagnostics
• Point Diagnostics

Module Diagnostics

Module diagnostics provide information on a module-wide basis. For example,

the Module Diagnostics dialog box indicates the mode within which a module
is operating, that is, Run, Remote Run, Remote Program, or Program.
Module Diagnostics are accessible from the Module Info category on the
Module Properties dialog box, as shown in Figure 40.
Figure 40 - Module Information Diagnostics

216 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Point Diagnostics

Point diagnostics provide information on an individual point basis. For

example, you can check individual points on a 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK safety
input module for the presence of a Short Circuit condition.

Remember the following:

• Not all Compact 5000 I/O digital modules provide point diagnostics.
• The point diagnostics that are available vary by module type and
functionality.
• There are some differences between modules, but most commonly, the
Module Properties dialog box category from which you can access point
diagnostics is Points.

Figure 41 shows how to access output point diagnostics on the 5069-OBV8S

module and the diagnostics dialog box.
Figure 41 - Point Diagnostics

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 217

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module

Logix Designer Application Tag Editor

Figure 42 show how fault conditions are indicated in the controller tags.
Figure 42 - Fault Indication in Controller Tags

Internal Fault Triggered on Table 62 describes conditions that can trigger InternalFault.
the Safety Output Module Table 62 - Conditions That Trigger InternalFault
Safety Modules
I/O Status
Output
Conditions Tag Value Diagnostic Value Indicator
Behavior State
• Output Mode - BIpolar
• Point Operation Type - Single
• Point Mode - Safety
• A load is connected between a
sourcing output point and a Faults I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1 InternalFault = 1
sinking output point.
• O.Ptxx.Data tag = 0
• An overload resistor shorts the
sourcing output point to 0V DC
• Output Mode - Bipolar
• Point Operation Type - Single The I/O status
• Point Mode - Safety or Safety indicator for
Pulse Test the faulted
• A load is connected between a Faults I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1 InternalFault = 1 output point is
sourcing output point and a steady red.
sinking output point.
• O.Ptxx.Data tag = 0
• Either output point shorts to 0V DC
• Output Mode - Sourcing I.Ptxx.Fault tag = 1 InternalFault = 1
• Point Operation Type - Single IMPORTANT: The tag IMPORTANT: The
value occurs on the diagnostic value
• Point Mode - Safety or Safety Faults faulted output point occurs on the faulted
Pulse Test and all of its output point and all of
• O.Ptxx.Data tag = 1 associated group its associated group
• Output point shorts to 24V DC points. points.

When the conditions that trigger the diagnostics as described in Table 62 are
corrected, the output faults are cleared, the tags and diagnostics reset to 0, and
the I/O status indicators turn off.

218 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B

Module Tag Definitions

Topic Page
Name Conventions 220
Access the Tags 221
5069-IA16 Module Tags 222
5069-IB16 Module Tags 223
5069-IB16F Module Tags 225
5069-IB6F-3W Module Tags 232
5069-OA16 Module Tags 239
5069-OB8 Module Tags 241
5069-OB16 Module Tags 243
5069-OB16F Module Tags 245
5069-OW4I, 5069-OW16, and 5069-OX4I Module Tags 248
5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK Module Tags 250
5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Module Tags 252

Module tags are created when you add a module to the Logix Designer
application project.

The set of tags that are associated with any module depends on the choices that
you make in the Module Definition dialog box. For example, if you use a Listen
Only Connection, the Logix Designer application creates only Input tags for
that module.

There are four sets of tags.

• Configuration
• Event Input - 5069-IB16F and 5069-IB6F-3W modules only
• Event Output - 5069-IB16F and 5069-IB6F-3W modules only
• Input
• Output

IMPORTANT The tables that are in this section list all tags available with a module. Not all
tags in the list are used when that module type is added to a project. Tag
use varies by module configuration.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 219

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Name Conventions The module tags use defined naming conventions. The conventions are
as follows:
Standard Modules
• One of the following:
- Module is local - Local
- Module is remote - Name of the remote adapter
• Slot number
• Tag type
• Channel/point number
• Parameter
Safety Modules

Tag for Local Module

The following example module tag name is for fault data on channel 1 of a
5069-OA16 output module in the second slot of a local system. The fault data is
an input tag.
Local:2:I.Pt01.Fault

Tag for Remote Module

The following example module tag name is for the Off to On input filter on
channel 0 of a 5069-IB16 output module in the first slot of a remote system. The
EtherNet/IP™ adapter name is remote_5069_adapter, and the filter setting is a
configuration tag.
remote_5069_adapter:1:C.Pt00.InputOffOnFilter

220 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Access the Tags You can view tags from the Tag Editor.
Standard Modules 1. Open your Logix Designer application project.
2. Right-click Controller Tags and choose Monitor Tags.

Safety Modules

3. Open the tags as necessary to view specific tags.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 221

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-IA16 Module Tags This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-IA16 module.
Standard Modules
Configuration Tags
Table 63 describes the 5069-IA16 module configuration tags.

Table 63 - 5069-IA16 Module Configuration Tags

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
The valid values are determined by the input signal.
Input signal is 120V AC.
• 13 = 1 ms
Input signal is 240V AC.
The amount of time that a signal must be in the on state • 13 = 1 ms
before the input data indicates the on state.
Ptxx.InputOffOnFilter SINT The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all • 14 = 2 ms
products support all enumeration values. • 15 = 5 ms
IMPORTANT: Logix Designer application lets you enter tag values for filter
values that are invalid for some input signals.
Make sure that you select a valid input filter value. If you select an invalid
input filter value, the module can read signal levels incorrectly.
Input signal is 120V AC:
• 16 = 10 ms
The amount of time that a signal must be in the off state • 17 = 20 ms
before the input data indicates the off state. Input signal is 240V AC:
Ptxx.InputOnOffFilter SINT The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all
products support all enumeration values. • 15 = 5 ms
• 16 = 10 ms
• 17 = 20 ms

Input Tags
Table 64 describes the 5069-IA16 module input tags.
Table 64 - 5069-IA16 Module Input Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module is not
connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the prognostics
threshold is reached.
threshold is reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is
detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition transitions from • -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT detected to not detected.
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 (-1) to The value of 0 is skipped except during module power-up.
1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted • 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
for use in the application. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to
Ptxx.Faults BOOL For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change
to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree • 1 = Uncertain data
of inaccuracy is not known. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change
to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.

222 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-IB16 Module Tags This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-IB16 module.
Standard Modules You use the 5069-IB16 module profile in your Logix Designer application
project with the 5069-IB16K module.

Configuration Tags
Table 65 describes the 5069-IB16 module configuration tags.

Table 65 - 5069-IB16 Module Configuration Tags

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 9 = 0 µs
• 10 = 100 µs
• 11 = 200 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the on state • 12 = 500 µs
before the input data indicates the on state. • 13 = 1 ms
Counterxx.InputOffOnFilter SINT The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all • 14 = 2 ms
products support all enumeration values. • 15 = 5 ms
• 16 = 10 ms
• 17 = 20 ms
• 18 = 50 ms
• 9 = 0 µs
• 10 = 100 µs
• 11 = 200 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the off state • 12 = 500 µs
before the input data indicates the off state. • 13 = 1 ms
Counterxx.InputOnOffFilter SINT The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all • 14 = 2 ms
products support all enumeration values. • 15 = 5 ms
• 16 = 10 ms
• 17 = 20 ms
• 18 = 50 ms
Determines whether the simple counter rolls over to 0 when • 0 = Maximum value
Counterxx.RolloverAtPreset BOOL it reaches O:Preset (1) or at 2147483647 (0). • 1 = Preset value
• 9 = 0 µs
• 10 = 100 µs
• 11 = 200 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the on state • 12 = 500 µs
before the input data indicates the on state. • 13 = 1 ms
Ptxx.InputOffOnFilter SINT The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all • 14 = 2 ms
products support all enumeration values. • 15 = 5 ms
• 16 = 10 ms
• 17 = 20 ms
• 18 = 50 ms
• 9 = 0 µs
• 10 = 100 µs
• 11 = 200 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the off state • 12 = 500 µs
before the input data indicates the off state. • 13 = 1 ms
Ptxx.InputOnOffFilter SINT The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all • 14 = 2 ms
products support all enumeration values. • 15 = 5 ms
• 16 = 10 ms
• 17 = 20 ms
• 18 = 50 ms

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 223

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Input Tags
Table 66 describes the 5069-IB16 module input tags.
Table 66 - 5069-IB16 Module Input Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module is
not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the prognostics
threshold is reached.
threshold is reached
Indicates if the module is operating outside its designed • 0 = Good
Uncertain BOOL operating range of if data is under manual or override control. • 1 = Uncertain
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is
detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition transitions -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT from detected to not detected.
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 (-1) The value of 0 is skipped except during module power-up.
to 1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Off
Counterxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that counter data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted • 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
for use in the application. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to correct
Counterxx.Fault BOOL For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on the cause of the inaccuracy.
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change
to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the counter data can be inaccurate but the degree • 1 = Uncertain data
of inaccuracy is not known. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to correct
Counterxx.Uncertain BOOL For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on the cause of the inaccuracy.
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change
to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.
When set, indicates the corresponding counter Done bit (rising or • 0 = Corresponding Done bit did not trigger the event
Counterxx.Done BOOL falling depending on configuration) triggered the event. • 1 = Corresponding Done bit triggered the event
The counter counted up to Preset -1 and continued counting from • 0 = Counter has not counted up to Preset - 1 and continued
or 0. counting from 0
Counterxx.Rollover BOOL The O:RolloverAck bit transitioning from 0 to 1 or the O:Reset • 1 = Counter counted up to Preset - 1 and continued counting
transitioning from 0 to 1 clears this bit. from 0
Counterxx.Count DINT The number of input transitions counted by a counter. All values.
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted • 1 = Bad data (faulted)
for use in the application. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to correct
Ptxx.Fault BOOL For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on the cause of the inaccuracy.
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change
to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree • 1 = Uncertain data
of inaccuracy is not known. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to correct
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on the cause of the inaccuracy.
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change
to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.

224 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Output Tags
Table 67 describes the 5069-IB16 module output tags. The 5069-IB16 module
output tags are only available if you have enabled counters in the Module
Definition dialog box.
Table 67 - 5069-IB16 Module Output Tags
Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
When this bit transitions from 0 to 1 I:Count and I:Rollover are • 0 = I:Count and I:Rollover values are not set to 0
Counterxx.Reset BOOL set to zero. • 1 = I:Count and I:Rolloever values are set to 0
Clears the Rollover bit in the input tag when it transitions • 0 = I:Rollover bit is not cleared
Counterxx.RolloverAck BOOL from 0 to 1. • 1 = I:Rollover bit is cleared
• If RolloverAtPreset is set, the counter counts to the Preset
value and then rolls over to zero.
• If RolloverAtPreset is not set, the counter sets the Done bit
and continues counting up to Max DINT.
Counterxx.Preset DINT • If C:RolloverAtPreset = 1, then if I:Count ≥ O:Preset, 0…2,147,483,647
I:Count=0, else I:Done bit always = 0. Set I:Rollover bit
when I:Count transitions from O:Preset – 1 to 0.
• If C:RolloverAtPreset = 0, then if I:Count ≥ O:Preset, I:Done
= 1, else I:Done = 0. Set I:Rollover bit when I:Count
transitions from 2,147,483,647 to 0.

5069-IB16F Module Tags This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-IB16F module.
Standard Modules
Configuration Tags
Table 68 describes the 5069-IB16F module configuration tags.

Table 68 - 5069-IB16F Module Configuration Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
5 = 0 µs
6 = 5 µs
7 = 10 µs
8 = 20 µs
9 = 50 µs
10 = 100 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the on state before the input data
indicates the on state. The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all 11 = 200 µs
Counterxx.InputOffOnFilter SINT 12 = 500 µs
products support all enumeration values. 13 = 1 ms
14 = 2 ms
15 = 5 ms
16 = 10 ms
17 = 20 ms
18 = 50 ms
5 = 0 µs
6 = 5 µs
7 = 10 µs
8 = 20 µs
9 = 50 µs
10 = 100 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the off state before the input data
indicates the off state. The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all 11 = 200 µs
Counterxx.InputOnOffFilter SINT 12 = 500 µs
products support all enumeration values. 13 = 1 ms
14 = 2 ms
15 = 5 ms
16 = 10 ms
17 = 20 ms
18 = 50 ms

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 225

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 68 - 5069-IB16F Module Configuration Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
Determines whether the simple counter rolls over to 0 when it reaches O:Preset (1) or • 0 = Maximum value
Counterxx.RolloverAtPreset BOOL at 2147483647 (0). • 1 = Preset value
5 = 0 µs
6 = 5 µs
7 = 10 µs
8 = 20 µs
9 = 50 µs
10 = 100 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the on state before the input data
indicates the on state. The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all 11 = 200 µs
Ptxx.InputOffOnFilter SINT 12 = 500 µs
products support all enumeration values. 13 = 1 ms
14 = 2 ms
15 = 5 ms
16 = 10 ms
17 = 20 ms
18 = 50 ms
5 = 0 µs
6 = 5 µs
7 = 10 µs
8 = 20 µs
9 = 50 µs
10 = 100 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the off state before the input data
indicates the off state. The amount of time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all 11 = 200 µs
Ptxx.InputOnOffFilter SINT 12 = 500 µs
products support all enumeration values. 13 = 1 ms
14 = 2 ms
15 = 5 ms
16 = 10 ms
17 = 20 ms
18 = 50 ms
Ptxx.ChatterTime INT A value from 1…10000 ms in whole ms increments. 1…10000
• 0 = Disabled
Ptxx.ChatterCount SINT The number of input changes that are considered Chatter.
• 2…127 = Enabled
• 0 = Capture disabled (default) for OFF to ON input
Enables capturing Off to On time stamps. If cleared, the point does not record Off to transitions
Ptxx.CaptureOffOnEn BOOL On time stamps.
• 1 = Capture enabled for OFF to ON input transitions
• 0 = Capture disabled (default) for ON to OFF input
Enables capturing On to Off time stamps. If cleared, the point does not record On to transitions
Ptxx.CaptureOnOffEn BOOL Off time stamps.
• 1 = Capture enabled for ON to OFF input transitions
When this bit is set, time stamps are latched; this means that a time stamp is not
overwritten until acknowledged. All subsequent transitions on that point are ignored
until acknowledged/reset.
If the bit is not set, the new LO time stamp overwrites the first LO time stamp
immediately, even if the controller has yet to extract that data.
You can acknowledge the time stamp in the following ways:
• Off to On transition time stamp:
The Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumber.x input tag value is written to the • 0 = time stamps are overwritten with each
Ptxx.TimestampxxxxxNumberAck output tag value. successive COS transition.
Ptxx.TimestampLatchEn BOOL If time stamp Latching is enabled, the Ptxx.Timestampxxxx input tag remains the
same until the next input Off to On transition occurs. Otherwise, the input tag value 1 = time stamps are latched until acknowledged.
•
is cleared.
• On to Off transition time stamp:
The Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumber.x input tag value is written to the
Ptxx.TimestampxxxxxNumberAck output tag value.
If time stamp Latching is enabled, the Ptxx.Timestampxxxx input tag remains the
same until the next input On to Off transition. Otherwise, the input tag value is
cleared.

226 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Event Input Tags

Table 69 describes the 5069-IB16F module event input tags. The event
input tags are displayed only if Data with Events is selected in the Module
Definition window.
Table 69 - 5069-IB16F Module Event Input Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run Mode
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module is
not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics
Diagnostic Active BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the prognostics threshold is
threshold is reached.
reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is
detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition transitions -128…+127
DiagnosticSequence Count SINT from detected to not detected.
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 (-1) The value of 0 is skipped except during module power-up.
to 1 skipping zero.
Eventx BOOL Indicates the number of the event. 0…3
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted • 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
for use in the application. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to correct the
Eventx.PtxxFault BOOL For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on cause of the inaccuracy.
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change to 1 is
removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree • 1 = Uncertain data
of inaccuracy is not known. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to correct the
Eventx.Uncertain BOOL For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on cause of the inaccuracy.
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change to 1 is
removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.
Indicates when an event has been discarded because events are • 0 = An event status has not been dropped.
Eventx.EventDropped BOOL occurring faster than they are being acknowledged. • 1 = An event status has been dropped.
Indicates whether an event triggered when an input transition
Eventx.EventRising BOOL 0 or 1
results in an event pattern being matched.
Indicates whether an event triggered when an input transition
Eventx.EventFalling BOOL 0 or 1
resulted in an event pattern no longer being matched.
• 0 = CIP Sync is not available
Eventx.CIPSyncValid BOOL Indicates whether the module is synced with a 1588 master.
• 1 = CIP Sync is available
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
Indicates that the module was once synced with a 1588 master, • 1 = A valid time master was detected on the backplane, but the time
Eventx.CIPSyncTimeout BOOL but is not now due to a timeout. master has timed out. The module is using its local clock and can be
drifting away from the last known time master.
The number of events currently queued in the modules. A value
Eventx.EventsPending SINT greater than 0 indicates that the controller is not currently All positive values.
keeping up with the rate of events.
Running count of events, which increments by one each new time
event. The originator sets the Event Number ACK to the Event
Eventx.EventNumber DINT Number to acknowledge receipt of the event. When the All values.
EventNumber reaches it maximum value and rolls over it is to roll
over to 1, not 0.
Eventx.EventTimestamp LINT The time the event occurred. All positive values.
When set, indicates the corresponding counter Done bit (rising or • 0 = Corresponding counter Done bit did not trigger the event
Eventx.CounterxxDone BOOL
falling depending on configuration) triggered the event. • 1 = Corresponding counter Done bit triggered the event
When set, indicates the corresponding data value (rising or falling • 0 = Corresponding data value did not trigger the event
Eventx.PtxxData BOOL depending on configuration) triggered the event. • 1 = Corresponding data value triggered the event
• 0 = Corresponding counter did not have a fault indicated when the
When set, indicates that the corresponding counter had a fault event occurred
Eventx.CounterxxFault BOOL indicated when the event occurred. • 1 = Corresponding counter did have a fault indicated when the event
occurred
Detects whether the signal is good data. The fault is set to 1 by • 0 = Good
Eventx.Fault BOOL the originator when the connection is lost. • 1 = Bad

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 227

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Event Output Tags

Table 70 describes the 5069-IB16F module event output tags. The event
output tags are displayed only if Data with Events is selected in the Module
Definition window.
Table 70 - 5069-IB16F Module Event Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
0 = Event trigger definition is not active and events are not
When set, the corresponding event trigger definition is active triggered when conditions match the definition
Eventxx.En BOOL and events are triggered when conditions match the definition. 1 = Event trigger definition is active and events are triggered
when conditions match the definition
When set an event is to trigger each time a condition change
Eventxx.EventRisingEn BOOL 0 or 1
results in conditions that match the event trigger definition.
When set, an event is to trigger each time a condition change
Eventxx.EventFallingEn BOOL results in conditions that no longer match the event trigger 0 or 1
definition.
When set, events are latched until acknowledged. A new event is • 0 = Not latched (default)
Eventxx.LatchEn BOOL lost if the previous event has not been acknowledged. When not
set, new events overwrite old events. • 1 = Latched
When transitions from 0 to 1, resets all events and clears the • 0 = Events are not cleared.
Eventxx.ResetEvent BOOL event queue on the channel. • 1 = Events are cleared when a rising edge occurs.
• 0 = When all selected conditions achieve the configured
For events, determines whether each condition that is indicated values, an event is triggered.
Eventxx.IndependentConditionTriggerEn BOOL in the trigger definition can initiate an event independently. • 1 = When any selected condition achieves the configured
value, an event is triggered.
The controller writes back the EI:Event[<n>].EventNumber into
this EO:Event[<n>].EventNumberAck to indicate receipt of the
Eventxx.EventNumberAck DINT All values
event. All events with I:EventNumbers that occurred before
EventNumberAck is acknowledged.
0 = Corresponding counter does not participate in the event
When set, indicates that the corresponding counter is to trigger definition
Eventxx.CounterxxSelect BOOL participate in the event trigger definition. 1= Corresponding counter participates in the event trigger
definition
When set, indicates that the corresponding data value is to
Eventxx.PtxxDataSelect BOOL 0 or 1
participate in the event trigger definition.
If the counter function is selected in the event trigger definition, 0 or 1
Eventxx.CounterxxValue BOOL this member indicates that value that is to trigger the event.
• 0 = Input inactive
Eventxx.PtxxDataValue BOOL Indicates the input value of the event point data.
• 1 = Input active

Input Tags
Table 71 describes the 5069-IB16F module input tags.
Table 71 - 5069-IB16F Module Input Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run Mode
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module is not connected, it
changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Diagnostic Active BOOL Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached. • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
prognostics threshold is reached
• 0 = CIP Sync is not available
CIPSyncValid BOOL Indicates whether the module is synced with a 1588 master.
• 1 = CIP Sync is available
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
Indicates that the module was once synced with a 1588 master, but is not now • 1 = A valid time master was detected on the
CIPSyncTimeout BOOL backplane, but the time master has timed out.
due to a timeout.
The module is using its local clock and can be
drifting away from the last known time master.

228 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 71 - 5069-IB16F Module Input Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is detected, and when a
-128…+127
DiagnosticSequence Count SINT distinct diagnostic condition transitions from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 (-1) to 1 skipping power-up.
zero.
•
0 = Off
Counterxx.Data BOOL Current output data to be applied for normal (unscheduled) outputs.
•
1 = On
•
0 = Good data
•
1 = Bad data (Faulted)
Indicates that counter data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Counterxx.Fault BOOL the application. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree of inaccuracy If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Counterxx.Uncertain BOOL is not known. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
Counterxx.Done BOOL Indicates that the I:Count tag ≥ O:Preset.G430. 0 or 1
The counter counted up to RolloverValue - 1 (for HSC) or Preset -1 (for simple
counters) and then continued counting from the O:Rollunder (for HSC) or 0 (for 0 or 1
Counterxx.Rollover BOOL simple counters). The O:RolloverAck bit transitioning from 0 to 1 or the O:Reset
transitioning from 0 to 1 clears this bit.
Counterxx.Count DINT The number of input transitions counted by a counter. All values
Indicates when an event has been discarded because events are occurring faster • 0 = An event status has not been dropped.
EventStatus[x].EventDropped BOOL than they are being acknowledged. • 1 = An event status has been dropped.
• 0 = CIP Sync is not available
EventStatus[x].CIPSyncValid BOOL Indicates whether the module is synced with a 1588 master.
• 1 = CIP Sync is available
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
Indicates that the module was once synced with a 1588 master, but is not now • 1 = A valid time master was detected on the
EventStatus[x].CIPSyncTimeout BOOL backplane, but the time master has timed out.
due to a timeout.
The module is using its local clock and can be
drifting away from the last known time master.
When EO.Event[<n>].ResetEvent transitions from 0 to 1,
I.EventStatus[<n>].EventReset transitions to 1 to indicate that the reset was • 0 = Do not reset
EventStatus[x].EventReset BOOL received and completed. It stays 1 until EO.Event[<n>].ResetEvent transition to • 1 = Reset
zero.
The number of events currently queued in the modules. A value greater than zero All positive values.
EventStatus[x].EventsPending SINT indicates that the controller is not currently keeping up with the rate of events.
Running count of events, which increments by one each new time event. The
originator sets the Event Number ACK to the Event Number to acknowledge
EventStatus[x].EventNumber DINT receipt of the event. When the EventNumber reaches it maximum value and rolls All values.
over it is to roll over to 1, not 0.
When set, indicates the corresponding data value (rising or falling depending on 0 or 1
PtxxData BOOL configuration) triggered the event.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in the If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
PtxxFault BOOL application. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree of inaccuracy If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL is not known. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 229

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 71 - 5069-IB16F Module Input Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Normal
Ptxx.Chatter BOOL Indicates if the input is chattering per the ChatterTime and ChatterCount settings.
• 1 = Input is chattering
Indicates an Off to On time stamp was lost in a discrete product. If
Ptxx.TimestampOverflowOffOn BOOL TimestampLatchEn is set, a new time stamp was not recorded because one is 0 or 1
already latched. If TimestampLatchEn is clear, a time stamp was overwritten.
Indicates an On to Off time stamp was lost in a discrete product. If
Ptxx.TimestampOverflowOnOff BOOL TimestampLatchEn is set, a new time stamp was not recorded because one is 0 or 1
already latched. If TimestampLatchEn is clear, a time stamp was overwritten.
• 0 = CIP Sync is not available
Ptxx.CIPSyncValid BOOL Indicates whether the module is synced with a 1588 master.
• 1 = CIP Sync is available
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
Indicates that the module was once synced with a 1588 master, but is not now • 1 = A valid time master was detected on the
Ptxx.CIPSyncTimeout BOOL backplane, but the time master has timed out.
due to a timeout.
The module is using its local clock and can be
drifting away from the last known time master.
A time stamp number for the Off to On transition for the most-recently produced
time stamp.
IMPORTANT: If time stamp Latching is enabled, when this tag value matches the All values.
Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumber INT Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumberAck output tag value, the Pt.xxTimestampOffOn
input tag remains the same until the next input Off to On transition.
Otherwise, the input tag value is cleared.
A time stamp number for the On to Off transition for the most-recently produced
time stamp.
IMPORTANT: If time stamp Latching is enabled, when this tag value matches the All values.
Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumber INT Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumberAck output tag value, the Pt.xxTimestampOnOff
input tag remains the same until the next input On to Off transition.
Otherwise, the input tag value is cleared.
64-bit time stamp corresponding to when a change of state Off to On was
recorded at the input.
Ptxx.TimestampOffOn LINT IMPORTANT: This number is cleared when Pt.xx.TimestampOffOnNumber input tag All values.
value and the Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumberAck output tag value match.
64-bit time stamp corresponding to when a change of state On to Off was
recorded at the input.
Ptxx.TimestampOnOff LINT IMPORTANT: This number is cleared when Pt.xx.TimestampOnOffNumber input tag All values.
value and the Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumberAck output tag value match.

230 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Output Tags
Table 72 describes the 5069-IB16F module output tags.
Table 72 - 5069-IB16F Module Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Do not reset
Counterxx.Reset BOOL When this bit transitions from 0 to 1, I:Count, and I:Rollover are set to zero.
• 1 = Reset
Counterxx.RolloverAck BOOL Clears the Rollunder tag in the input tag when it transitions from 0 to 1. 0 or 1
• If RolloverAtPreset is set, the counter counts to the Preset value and then rolls over to zero.
• If RolloverAtPreset is not set, the counter sets the Done bit and continues counting up to Max
DINT.
Counterxx.Preset DINT • If C:RolloverAtPreset = 1, then if I:Count ≥ O:Preset, I:Count=0., else I:Done bit always = 0. Set 0…2,147,483,647
I:Rollover bit when I:Count transitions from O:Preset – 1 to 0.
• If C:RolloverAtPreset = 0, then if I:Count ≥ O:Preset, I:Done = 1, else I:Done = 0. Set I:Rollover
bit when I:Count transitions from 2,147,483,647 to 0.
• 0 = time stamps are not erased.
Ptxx.ResetTimestamps BOOL Erases all recorded time stamps for the input channel when it transitions from 0 to 1.
• 1 = time stamps are erased.
An Off to On time stamp identifier that is written by the controller to indicate that the identified
time stamp has been seen and acted on.
• When Latching is enabled and the time stamp Number that is received from the controller
transitions to the most recent time stamp that is produced, the module can produce a new All values.
Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumberAck INT time stamp.
• When Latching is disabled and the time stamp Number that is received from the controller
transitions to the most recent time stamp that is produced, the PtxxTimestampOffOn and
the Ptxx.TimestampOverflowOffOn tags are cleared.
An On to Off time stamp identifier that is written by the controller to indicate that the identified
time stamp has been seen and acted on.
• When Latching is enabled and the time stamp Number that is received from the controller
transitions to the most recent time stamp that is produced, the module can produce a new All values.
Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumberAck INT
time stamp.
• When Latching is disabled and the time stamp Number that is received from the controller
transitions to the most recent time stamp that is produced, the PtxxTimestampOnOff and
the Ptxx.TimestampOverflowOnOff tags are cleared.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 231

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-IB6F-3W Module Tags This section describes the tags that are associated with the
5069-IB6F-3W module.
Standard Modules

Configuration Tags
Table 73 describes the 5069-IF6F-3W module configuration tags.

Table 73 - 5069-IB6F-3W Configuration Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 5 = 0 µs
• 6 = 5 µs
• 7 = 10 µs
• 8 = 20 µs
• 9 = 50 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the on state • 10 = 100 µs
Counterxx.InputOffOnFilter SINT before the input data indicates the on state. The amount of • 11 = 200 µs
time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all products • 12 = 500 µs
support all enumeration values. • 13 = 1 ms
• 14 = 2 ms
• 15 = 5 ms
• 16 = 10 ms
• 17 = 20 ms
• 18 = 50 ms
• 5 = 0 µs
• 6 = 5 µs
• 7 = 10 µs
• 8 = 20 µs
• 9 = 50 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the off state • 10 = 100 µs
before the input data indicates the off state. The amount of • 11 = 200 µs
Counterxx.InputOnOffFilter SINT time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all products • 12 = 500 µs
support all enumeration values. • 13 = 1 ms
• 14 = 2 ms
• 15 = 5 ms
• 16 = 10 ms
• 17 = 20 ms
• 18 = 50 ms
Determines whether the simple counter rolls over to 0 when • 0 = Maximum value
Counterxx.RolloverAtPreset BOOL it reaches O:Preset (1) or at 2147483647 (0). • 1 = Preset value
• 5 = 0 µs
• 6 = 5 µs
• 7 = 10 µs
• 8 = 20 µs
• 9 = 50 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the on state • 10 = 100 µs
before the input data indicates the on state. The amount of • 11 = 200 µs
Ptxx.InputOffOnFilter SINT time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all products • 12 = 500 µs
support all enumeration values. • 13 = 1 ms
• 14 = 2 ms
• 15 = 5 ms
• 16 = 10 ms
• 17 = 20 ms
• 18 = 50 ms

232 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 73 - 5069-IB6F-3W Configuration Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 5 = 0 µs
• 6 = 5 µs
• 7 = 10 µs
• 8 = 20 µs
• 9 = 50 µs
The amount of time that a signal must be in the off state • 10 = 100 µs
before the input data indicates the off state. The amount of • 11 = 200 µs
Ptxx.InputOnOffFilter SINT
time is indicated using an enumeration. Not all products • 12 = 500 µs
support all enumeration values. • 13 = 1 ms
• 14 = 2 ms
• 15 = 5 ms
• 16 = 10 ms
• 17 = 20 ms
• 18 = 50 ms
Ptxx.ChatterTime INT A value from 1…10000 ms in whole ms increments. 1…10000
• 0 = Disabled
Ptxx.ChatterCount SINT The number of input changes that are considered Chatter.
• 2…127 = Enabled
• 0 = Capture disabled (default) for OFF to ON input
Enables capturing Off to On time stamps. If cleared, point transitions
Ptxx.CaptureOffOnEn BOOL does not record Off to On time stamps.
• 1 = Capture enabled for OFF to ON input transitions
• 0 = Capture disabled (default) for ON to OFF input
Enables capturing On to Off time stamps. If cleared, point transitions
Ptxx.CaptureOnOffEn BOOL does not record On to Off time stamps.
• 1 = Capture enabled for ON to OFF input transitions
When this bit is set, time stamps are latched; this means that
a time stamp is not overwritten until acknowledged. All
subsequent transitions on that point are ignored until
acknowledged/reset. If the bit is not set, the new LO time
stamp overwrites the first LO time stamp immediately, even if • 0 = time stamps are overwritten with each
Ptxx.TimestampLatchEn BOOL the controller has yet to extract that data. successive COS transition.
The time stamp can also be acknowledge if the • 1 = time stamps are latched until acknowledged.
Ptxx.TimestampxxxxxNumber input tag value is written to the
Ptxx.TimestampxxxxxNumberAck output tag value.
It is worth noting that writing the input tag value to the output
tag value, clears the Ptxx.Timestampxxxxx input tag value.(1)
(1) In this case, the xxxxx in the tag names represents OffOn or OnOff tags based on what transition occurred. That is, a change in state from Off to On or On to Off.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 233

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Event Input Tags

Table 74 describes the 5069-IB6F-3W module event input tags. The event input
tags are displayed only if you select Data with Events in the Module Definition
window.
Table 74 - 5069-IB6F-3W Module Event Input Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module is not connected, it
changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
DiagnosticActive BOOL Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached. • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
prognostics threshold is reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is detected, and when a -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT distinct diagnostic condition transitions from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 (-1) to 1 skipping zero. power-up.
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run Mode
Eventx BOOL Indicates the number of the event. 0…3
Detects whether the signal is good data. The fault is set to 1 by the originator when • 0 = Good data
Eventx.Fault BOOL the connection is lost. • 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree of inaccuracy is • 1 = Uncertain data
not known. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Eventx.Uncertain BOOL module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information,
see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
Indicates when an event has been discarded because events are occurring faster • 0 = An event status has not been dropped.
Eventx.EventDropped BOOL than they are being acknowledged. • 1 = An event status has been dropped.
Indicates whether an event triggered when an input transition results in an event 0 or 1
Eventx.EventRising BOOL pattern being matched.
Indicates whether an event triggered when an input transition resulted in an event 0 or 1
Eventx.EventFalling BOOL pattern no longer being matched.
• 0 = CIP Sync is not available
Eventx.CIPSyncValid BOOL Indicates whether the module is synced with a 1588 master.
• 1 = CIP Sync is available
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
Indicates that the module was once synced with a 1588 master, but is not now due • 1 = A valid time master was detected on the
Eventx.CIPSyncTimeout BOOL backplane, but the time master has timed out. The
to a timeout.
module is using its local clock and can be drifting
away from the last known time master.
The number of events currently queued in the modules. A value greater than 0
Eventx.EventsPending SINT All positive values.
indicates that the controller is not currently keeping up with the rate of events.
Running count of events, which increments by one each new time event. The
originator sets the Event Number ACK to the Event Number to acknowledge receipt All values.
Eventx.EventNumber DINT of the event. When the EventNumber reaches it maximum value and rolls over it is
to roll over to 1, not 0.
Eventx.Time stamp LINT The time the event occurred. All positive values.
When set, indicates the corresponding counter Done bit (rising or falling depending 0 or 1
Eventx.CounterxxDone BOOL on configuration) triggered the event.
When set, indicates the corresponding data value (rising or falling depending on
Eventx.PtxxData BOOL 0 or 1
configuration) triggered the event.
When set, indicates that the corresponding counter had a fault indicated when the 0 or 1
Eventx.CounterxxFault BOOL event occurred.
• 0 = Good
• 1 = Bad, causing fault
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in the If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Eventx.PtxxFault BOOL application. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.

234 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Event Output Tags

Table 75 describes the 5069-IB6F-3W module event output tags. The event output
tags are displayed only if you select Data with Events in the Module Definition
window.
Table 75 - 5069-IB6F-3W Module Event Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
When set, the corresponding event trigger definition is active and
Eventxx.En BOOL 0 or 1
events are triggered when conditions match the definition.
When set, an event is to trigger each time a condition change results
Eventxx.EventRisingEn BOOL 0 or 1
in conditions that match the event trigger definition.
When set, an event is to trigger each time a condition change results
Eventxx.EventFallingEn BOOL 0 or 1
in conditions that no longer match the event trigger definition.
When set, events are latched until acknowledged. A new event is lost • 0 = Not latched (default)
Eventxx.LatchEn BOOL if the previous event has not been acknowledged. When not set, new
events overwrite old events. • 1 = Latched
When the value transitions from 0 to 1, resets all events and clears • 0 = Events are not cleared
Eventxx.ResetEvent BOOL the event queue on the channel. • 1 = Events are cleared when a rising edge occurs
• 0 = When all selected conditions achieve the
For events, determines whether each condition that is indicated in configured values, an event is triggered.
Eventxx.IndependentConditionTriggerEn BOOL the trigger definition can initiate an event independently. • 1 = When any selected condition achieves the
configured value, an event is triggered.
The controller writes back the EI:Event[<n>].EventNumber into this
EO:Event[<n>].EventNumberAck to indicate receipt of the event. All
Eventxx.EventNumberAck DINT All values.
events with I:EventNumbers that occurred before EventNumberAck is
acknowledged.
When set, indicates that the corresponding counter is to participate
Eventxx.CounterxxSelect BOOL 0 or 1
in the event trigger definition.
When set, indicates that the corresponding data value is to
Eventxx.PtxxDataSelect BOOL 0 or 1
participate in the event trigger definition.
If the counter function is selected in the event trigger definition, this
Eventxx.CounterxxValue BOOL 0 or 1
member indicates that value that is to trigger the event.
• 0 = Input inactive
Eventxx.PtxxDataValue BOOL Input value of the event point data.
• 1 = Input active

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 235

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Input Tags
Table 76 describes the 5069-IB6F-3W module input tags.
Table 76 - 5069-IB6F-3W Module Input Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run Mode
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module is not connected, it
changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
DiagnosticActive BOOL Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached. • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
prognostics threshold is reached
• 0 = CIP Sync is not available
CIPSyncValid BOOL Indicates whether the module is synced with a 1588 master.
• 1 = CIP Sync is available
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
Indicates that the module was once synced with a 1588 master, but is not now • 1 = A valid time master was detected on the
CIPSyncTimeout BOOL backplane, but the time master has timed out. The
due to a timeout.
module is using its local clock and can be drifting
away from the last known time master.
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is detected, and when a -127…+128
distinct diagnostic condition transitions from detected to not detected.
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 (-1) to 1 skipping power-up.
zero.
Indicates if the module is operating outside its designed operating range of if • 0 = Good
Uncertain BOOL data is under manual or override control. • 1 = Uncertain
• 0 = Off
Counterxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in the If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Counterxx.Fault BOOL application. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the counter data can be inaccurate but the degree of inaccuracy If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Counterxx.Uncertain BOOL is not known. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
Counterxx.Done BOOL Indicates that the I:Count tag ≥ O:Preset.G430. 0 or 1
The counter counted up to RolloverValue - 1 (for HSC) or Preset -1 (for simple
counters) and then continued counting from the O:Rollunder (for HSC) or 0 (for 0 or 1
Counterxx.Rollover BOOL simple counters). The O:RolloverAck bit transitioning from 0 to 1 or the O:Reset
transitioning from 0 to 1 clears the bit.
Counterxx.Count DINT The number of input transitions counted by a counter. All values.
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
Indicates that the module was once synced with a 1588 master, but is not now • 1 = A valid time master was detected on the
EventStatusx.CIPSyncTimeout BOOL backplane, but the time master has timed out. The
due to a timeout.
module is using its local clock and can be drifting
away from the last known time master.
Indicates when an event has been discarded because events are occurring faster • 0 = An event status has not been dropped
EventStatusx.EventDropped BOOL than they are being acknowledged. • 1 = An event status has been dropped
Running count of events, which increments by one each new time event. The
originator sets the Event Number ACK to the Event Number to acknowledge
EventStatusx.EventNumber DINT receipt of the event. When the EventNumber reaches it maximum value and rolls All values.
over it is to roll over to 1, not 0.
When EO.Event[<n>].ResetEvent transitions from 0 to 1,
I.EventStatus[<n>].EventReset transitions to 1 to indicate that the reset was • 0 = Do not reset
EventStatusx.EventReset BOOL received and completed. It stays 1 until EO.Event[<n>].ResetEvent transition to • 1 = Reset
zero.
The number of events currently queued in the modules. A value greater than zero All positive values.
EventStatusx.EventsPending SINT indicates that the controller is not currently keeping up with the rate of events.

236 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 76 - 5069-IB6F-3W Module Input Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in the If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Fault BOOL application. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree of inaccuracy If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL is not known. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
1 = the Shows that the input is chattering per the ChatterTime and ChatterCount • 0 = Normal
Ptxx.Chatter BOOL settings. 0 = Normal • 1 = Input is chattering
Indicates an On to Off time stamp was lost in a discrete product. If
Ptxx.TimestampOverflowOnOff BOOL TimestampLatchEn is set, a new time stamp was not recorded because one is 0 or 1
already latched. If TimestampLatchEn is clear, a time stamp was overwritten.
Indicates an Off to On time stamp was lost in a discrete product. If
Ptxx.TimestampOverflowOffOn BOOL TimestampLatchEn is set, a new time stamp was not recorded because one is 0 or 1
already latched. If TimestampLatchEn is clear a time stamp was overwritten.
• 0 = CIP Sync is not available
Ptxx.CIPSyncValid BOOL Indicates whether the module is synced with a 1588 master.
• 1 = CIP Sync is available
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
Indicates that the module was once synced with a 1588 master, but is not now • 1 = A valid time master was detected on the
Ptxx.CIPSyncTimeout BOOL backplane, but the time master has timed out. The
due to a timeout.
module is using its local clock and can be drifting
away from the last known time master.
A time stamp number for the Off to On transition for the most-recently produced
time stamp.
IMPORTANT: If time stamp Latching is enabled, when this tag value matches the All values.
Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumber INT Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumberAck output tag value, the Pt.xxTimestampOffOn
input tag remains the same until the next input Off to On transition.
Otherwise, the input tag value is cleared.
A time stamp number for the On to Off transition for the most-recently produced
time stamp.
IMPORTANT: If time stamp Latching is enabled, when this tag value matches the All values.
Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumber INT Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumberAck output tag value, the Pt.xxTimestampOnOff
input tag remains the same until the next input On to Off transition.
Otherwise, the input tag value is cleared.
64-bit time stamp corresponding to when a change of state Off to On was
recorded at the input.
Ptxx.TimestampOffOn LINT IMPORTANT: This number is cleared when Pt.xx.TimestampOffOnNumber input tag All values.
value and the Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumberAck output tag value match.
64-bit time stamp corresponding to when a change of state On to Off was
recorded at the input.
Ptxx.TimestampOnOff LINT IMPORTANT: This number is cleared when Pt.xx.TimestampOnOffNumber input tag All values.
value and the Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumberAck output tag value match.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 237

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Output Tags
Table 77 describes the 5069-IB6F-3W module output tags.
Table 77 - 5069-IB6F-3W Module Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
When this bit transitions from 0 to 1, I:Count, and I:Rollover • 0 = Do not reset
Counterxx.Reset BOOL are set to zero. • 1 = Reset
Clears the Rollunder bit in the input tag when it transitions
Counterxx.RolloverAck BOOL 0 or 1
from 0 to 1.
• If RolloverAtPreset is set, the counter counts to the Preset
value and then rolls over to zero.
• If RolloverAtPreset is not set, the counter sets the Done bit
and continues counting up to Max DINT.
Counterxx.Preset DINT • If C:RolloverAtPreset = 1, then if I:Count ≥ O:Preset, 0…2,147,483,647
I:Count=0. I:Done bit always = 0. Set I:Rollover bit when
I:Count transitions from O:Preset – 1 to 0.
• If C:RolloverAtPreset = 0, then if I:Count ≥ O:Preset, I:Done
= 1, else I:Done = 0. Set I:Rollover bit when I:Count
transitions from 2,147,483,647 to 0.
Erases all recorded time stamps for the input channel when • 0 = time stamps are not erased
Ptxx.ResetTimestamps BOOL it transitions from 0 to 1. • 1 = time stamps are erased
An Off to On time stamp identifier that is written by the
controller to indicate that the identified time stamp has been
seen and acted on. When Latching is enabled and the time
stamp Number that is received from the controller matches
Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumberAck INT the most recent time stamp that is produced, the module can All values.
produce a new time stamp.
IMPORTANT: When this tag value matches the
Ptxx.TimestampOffOnNumber input tag value the
Pt.xxTimestampOffOn input tag value is cleared.
An On to Off time stamp identifier that is written by the
controller to indicate that the identified time stamp has been
seen and acted on. When Latching is enabled and the time
stamp Number that is received from the controller matches
Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumberAck INT the most recent time stamp that is produced, the module can All values.
produce a new time stamp.
IMPORTANT: When this tag value matches the
Ptxx.TimestampOnOffNumber input tag value, the
Pt.xxTimestampOnOff input tag value is cleared.

238 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-OA16 Module Tags This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-OA16 module.
Standard Modules
Configuration Tags
Table 78 describes the 5069-OA16 module configuration tags.

Table 78 - 5069-OA16 Module Configuration Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
Selects the behavior the output channel takes if a • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.FaultMode BOOL communication fault occurs. FaultValue defines the value to
go to when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the discrete output should assume if a • 0 = Off
Ptxx.FaultValue BOOL communication fault occurs when FaultMode = 0. • 1 = On
Selects the behavior the output channel should take when • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.ProgMode BOOL transitioned into Program mode. ProgValue defines the value
to go to when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the output should take when the • 0 = The output state is Off during Program mode.
Ptxx.ProgValue BOOL connection transitions to Program mode if the ProgMode bit
is set to "User-Defined Value". • 1 = The output state is On during Program mode.
• 0 = The output state is Off after the
If FaultValueStateDuration is nonzero, determines the final FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Ptxx.FaultFinalState BOOL Output state after the configured FaultValueStateDuration
time out occurs. • 1 = The output state is On after the
FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Determines if an output transitions to the Fault Mode when • 0 = Stay in Program Mode
Ptxx.ProgramToFaultEn BOOL the connection faults while in Program Mode. • 1 = Go to Fault mode
This value determines the length of time the Fault Mode state • 0 = Hold forever (default).
Ptxx.FaultValueStateDuration SINT is held before the FaultFinalState being applied. • 1, 2, 5, or 10 seconds

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 239

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Input Tags
Table 79 describes the 5069-OA16 module input tags.
Table 79 - 5069-OA16 Module Input Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run Mode
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module
is not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
threshold is reached.
prognostics threshold is reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is
detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition transitions -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 power-up.
(-1) to 1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be • 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
trusted for use in the application. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Fault BOOL on module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the • 1 = Uncertain data
degree of inaccuracy is not known. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.

Output Tags
Table 80 describes the 5069-OA16 module output tags.
Table 80 - 5069-OA16 Module Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current output value.
• 1 = On

240 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-OB8 Module Tags This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-OB8 module.
Standard Modules
Configuration Tags
Table 81 describes the 5069-OB8 module configuration tags.

Table 81 - 5069-OB8 Module Configuration Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
Selects the behavior the output channel takes if a • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.FaultMode BOOL communication fault occurs. FaultValue defines the value to
go to when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the output assumes if a • 0 = Off
Ptxx.FaultValue BOOL communication fault occurs when FaultMode = 0. • 1 = On
Selects the behavior the output channel takes when • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.ProgMode BOOL transitioned into Program mode. ProgValue defines the value
to go to when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the output takes when the connection • 0 = The output state is Off during Program mode.
Ptxx.ProgValue BOOL transitions to Program mode if the ProgMode bit is set to
"User-Defined Value". • 1 = The output state is On during Program mode.
• 0 = The output state is Off after the
If FaultValueStateDuration is nonzero, determines the final FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Ptxx.FaultFinalState BOOL Output state after the configured FaultValueStateDuration
timeout occurs. • 1 = The output state is On after the
FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Determines if an output transitions to the Fault Mode if the • 0 = Stay in Program Mode
Ptxx.ProgramToFaultEn BOOL connection faults while in Program Mode. • 1 = Go to Fault mode
• 0 = Disable
Ptxx.NoLoadEn BOOL Enables no load detection for output channels.
• 1 = Enable
This value determines the length of time the Fault Mode state • 0 = Hold forever (default).
Ptxx.FaultValueStateDuration SINT is held before the FaultFinalState being applied. • 1, 2, 5, or 10 seconds

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 241

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Input Tags
Table 82 describes the 5069-OB8 module input tags.
Table 82 - 5069-OB8 Module Input Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run Mode
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module
is not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
threshold is reached.
prognostics threshold is reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is
detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition transitions • -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 power-up.
(-1) to 1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be • 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
trusted for use in the application. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Fault BOOL on module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the • 1 = Uncertain data
degree of inaccuracy is not known. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
Indicates that the signal wire has been disconnected from • 0 = No fault
Ptxx.NoLoad BOOL one of its terminals or the RTB has been removed. Used with
Output channels. • 1 = Fault
• 0 = No short circuit
Ptxx.ShortCircuit BOOL Indicates an output short circuit or overcurrent.
• 1 = Short circuit or overcurrent

Output Tags
Table 83 describes the 5069-OB8 module output tags.
Table 83 - 5069-OB8 Module Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current output value.
• 1 = On

242 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-OB16 Module Tags This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-OB16 module.
You use the 5069-IB16 module profile in your Logix Designer application
Standard Modules project with the 5069-IB16K module.

Configuration Tags
Table 84 describes the 5069-OB16 module configuration tags.

Table 84 - 5069-OB16 Module Configuration Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
Selects the behavior the output channel takes if a • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.FaultMode BOOL communication fault occurs. FaultValue defines the value to
go to when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the output assumes if a • 0 = Off
Ptxx.FaultValue BOOL communication fault occurs when FaultMode = 0. • 1 = On
Selects the behavior that the output takes when transitioned • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.ProgMode BOOL into Program mode. ProgValue defines the value to go to
when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the output takes when the connection • 0 = The output state is Off during Program mode.
Ptxx.ProgValue BOOL transitions to Program mode if the ProgMode bit is set to
"User-Defined Value". • 1 = The output state is On during Program mode.
• 0 = The output state is Off after the
If FaultValueStateDuration is nonzero, determines the final FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Ptxx.FaultFinalState BOOL Output state after the configured FaultValueStateDuration
timeout occurs. • 1 = The output state is On after the
FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Determines if an output transitions to the Fault Mode if the • 0 = Stay in Program Mode
Ptxx.ProgramToFaultEn BOOL connection faults while in Program Mode. • 1 = Go to Fault mode
• 0 = Disable
Ptxx.NoLoadEn BOOL Enables no load detection for output channels.
• 1 = Enable
This value determines the length of time the Fault Mode state • 0 = Hold forever (default).
Ptxx.FaultValueStateDuration SINT is held before the FaultFinalState being applied. • 1, 2, 5, or 10 seconds

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 243

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Input Tags
Table 85 describes the 5069-OB16 module input tags.
Table 85 - 5069-OB16 Module Input Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run Mode
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module
is not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
threshold is reached.
prognostics threshold is reached
Indicates if the module is operating outside its designed • 0 = Good
Uncertain BOOL operating range of if data is under manual or override
control. • 1 = Uncertain
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is
detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition transitions -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 power-up.
(-1) to 1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be • 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
trusted for use in the application. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Fault BOOL module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the • 1 = Uncertain data
degree of inaccuracy is not known. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
Indicates that the signal wire has been disconnected from • 0 = No fault
Ptxx.NoLoad BOOL one of its terminals or the RTB has been removed. Used with
Output channels. • 1 = Fault
• 0 = No short circuit
Ptxx.ShortCircuit BOOL Indicates an output short circuit or overcurrent.
• 1 = Short circuit or overcurrent

Output Tags
Table 86 describes the 5069-OB16 module output tags.
Table 86 - 5069-OB16 Module Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current output value.
• 1 = On

244 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-OB16F Module Tags This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-OB16F
modules.
Standard Modules

Configuration Tags
Table 87 describes the 5069-OB16F module configuration tags.

Table 87 - 5069-OB16F Configuration Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
Selects the behavior the output channel takes if a • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.FaultMode BOOL communication fault occurs. FaultValue defines the value to
go to when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the output assumes if a • 0 = Off
Ptxx.FaultValue BOOL communication fault occurs when FaultMode = 0. • 1 = On
Selects the behavior that the output takes when transitioned • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.ProgMode BOOL into Program mode. ProgValue defines the value to go to
when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the output takes when the connection • 0 = The output state is Off during Program mode.
Ptxx.ProgValue BOOL transitions to Program mode if the ProgMode bit is set to
"User-Defined Value". • 1 = The output state is On during Program mode.
• 0 = The output state is Off after the
If FaultValueStateDuration is nonzero, determines the final FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Ptxx.FaultFinalState BOOL Output state after the configured FaultValueStateDuration
timeout occurs. • 1 = The output state is On after the
FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Determines if an output transitions to the Fault Mode if the • 0 = Stay in Program Mode
Ptxx.ProgramToFaultEn BOOL connection faults while in Program Mode. • 1 = Go to Fault mode
• 0 = Disable
Ptxx.NoLoadEn BOOL Enables no load detection for output channels.
• 1 = Enable
This value determines the length of time the Fault Mode state • 0 = Hold forever (default).
Ptxx.FaultValueStateDuration SINT is held before the FaultFinalState being applied. • 1, 2, 5, or 10 seconds

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 245

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Input Tags
Table 88 describes the 5069-OB16F module input tags.
Table 88 - 5069-OB16F Module Input Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run Mode
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module is not connected, it
changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
DiagnosticActive BOOL Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is reached. • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
prognostics threshold is reached
Indicates if the module is operating outside its designed operating range of if data • 0 = Good
Uncertain BOOL is under manual or override control. • 1 = Uncertain
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is detected, and when a -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT distinct diagnostic condition transitions from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 (-1) to 1 skipping zero. power-up.
• 0 = CIP Sync is not available
CIPSyncValid BOOL Indicates whether the module is synced with a 1588 master.
• 1 = CIP Sync is available
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
Indicates that the module was once synced with a 1588 master, but is not now due • 1 = A valid time master was detected on the
CIPSyncTimeout BOOL backplane, but the time master has timed out. The
to a timeout.
module is using its local clock and can be drifting
away from the last known time master.
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in the If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Fault BOOL application. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree of inaccuracy If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL is not known. module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
Indicates that the signal wire has been disconnected from one of its terminals or • 0 = No fault
Ptxx.NoLoad BOOL the RTB has been removed. Used with Output channels. • 1 = Fault
• 0 = No short circuit
Ptxx.ShortCircuit BOOL Indicates an output short circuit or overcurrent.
• 1 = Short circuit or overcurrent
• 1…32 = Valid schedule
Schedulex SINT Indicates which schedule to load from 32 available schedules.
• 0, 129…255 = No schedule

246 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 88 - 5069-OB16F Module Input Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Inactive
• 1 = Active – schedule is next to be applied to any
of the outputs.
• 2 = Current – schedule is not the next to be
applied one of the outputs.
• 3 = Expired – schedule has been applied.
Schedulex.State SINT Current state of the Tagschedule at index x. • 4 = Discarded – scheduled but mask was off, or
the requested schedule was late (received after
its scheduled application time) and a more recent
schedule has already been applied to that output
point.
• 5 = Late – received schedule after the time it is to
be applied.
Schedulex.ScheduleNumber SINT Echo of ScheduleNumber from the output image. • 0…3
Count of schedules that arrive late. That is, the arrival time is after scheduled time.
Counter rolls over every 65535 late updates. The output is still be driven to new
LateScheduleCount INT All values.
state if this is the most recent schedule for that point. Useful in indicating that
network delays/losses are causing scheduling issues.
Increments whenever the schedule sequence number in the output tag skips a
LostScheduleCount INT value, which can indicate a lost schedule. Counter rolls over every 65535 lost All values.
updates.

Output Tags
Table 89 describes the 5069-OB16F module output tags.
Table 89 - 5069-OB16F Module Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
Indicates the TimeBase for all schedule times in a scheduled
output consumed assembly or channel. The TimeBase + The
TimeBase LINT Schedule[n].TimeOffset determines the time for the Any positive value.
schedule. Base/Offset scheme that is used to fit enough
schedules into the assembly.
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Normal output data
Ptxx.ScheduleEn BOOL Specifies the use of normal output data or scheduled data.
• 1 = Scheduled data
Indicates which schedule to load from 32 available • 1…32 = Valid schedule
Schedulex SINT schedules. • 0, 129…255 = No schedule
There are 32 schedules available (for Neo R1 products). • 1…32 = Valid schedule
Schedulex.ID SINT Indicates which schedule to load. • 0 or 129…255 = No schedule
Indicates that the schedule information is valid and to
Schedulex.SequenceNumber SINT All values.
process this schedule.
Selects the output point that this schedule applies to. 0xFF 0…15
Schedulex.OutputPointSelect SINT means no output point selected.
Output data to be applied at time that is specified in
Schedulex.Data BOOL 0 or 1
schedule.
Offset from schedule base time. Used for scheduled output
Schedulex.TimeOffset DINT consumed tags. Base/Offset scheme that is used to fit All values.
enough schedules in the assembly.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 247

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-OW4I, 5069-OW16, and This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-OW4I,
5069-OX4I Module Tags 5069-OW16, and 5069-OX4I modules. The tags are the same for each module.

Standard Modules
Configuration Tags
Table 90 describes the 5069-OW4I and 5069-OX4I module configuration tags.

Table 90 - Relay Output High Current Module Configuration Tags

Name Size Definition Valid Values
Selects the behavior the output channel takes if a communication fault occurs. • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.FaultMode BOOL FaultValue defines the value to go to when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the output assumes if a communication fault occurs when • 0 = Off
Ptxx.FaultValue BOOL FaultMode = 0. • 1 = On
Selects the behavior the output takes when transitioned into Program mode. • 0 = Hold last state
Ptxx.ProgMode BOOL ProgValue defines the value to go to when set to user-defined value. • 1 = Go to a user-defined value
Defines the value that the output takes when the connection transitions to • 0 = The output state is Off during Program mode.
Ptxx.ProgValue BOOL Program mode if the ProgMode bit is set to "User-Defined Value". • 1 = The output state is On during Program mode.
• 0 = The output state is Off after the
If FaultValueStateDuration is nonzero, determines the final Output state after the FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Ptxx.FaultFinalState BOOL configured FaultValueStateDuration timeout occurs. • 1 = The output state is On after the
FaultValueStateDuration time expires.
Determines if an output transitions to the Fault Mode if the connection faults while • 0 = Stay in Program Mode
Ptxx.ProgramToFaultEn BOOL in Program Mode. • 1 = Go to Fault mode
This value determines the length of time the Fault Mode state is held before the • 0 = Hold forever (default).
Ptxx.FaultValueStateDuration SINT FaultFinalState being applied. • 1, 2, 5, or 10 seconds

248 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Input Tags
Table 91 describes the 5069-OW4I, 5069-OW16, 5069-OX4I module input tags.
Table 91 - Relay Output High Current Module Input Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Channel’s operating state
• 1 = Run Mode
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module
is not connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the
threshold is reached.
prognostics threshold is reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is
detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition transitions -128…127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 power-up.
(-1) to 1 skipping zero.
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Current input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that channel data is inaccurate and cannot be • 1 = Bad data (Faulted)
trusted for use in the application. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Fault BOOL on module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the • 1 = Uncertain data
degree of inaccuracy is not known. If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL module to correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on
page 67. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the
tag to change to 1 is removed, the tag
automatically resets to 0.

Output Tags
Table 92 describes the 5069-OW4I, 5069-OW16, and 5069-OX4I module outputs
tags.
Table 92 - Relay Output High Current Module Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Current input value.
• 1 = On

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 249

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-IB8S or
Module Tags 5069-IB8SK module.

Safety Modules
Input Tags
Table 93 describes the 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module input tags.

Table 93 - 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK Module Input Tags

Data Definition
Name Valid Values
Type
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Module’s operating state
• 1 = Run
Indicates if a connection is running. • 0 = Connection running
ConnectionFaulted BOOL The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the module is not
connected, it changes the tag to 1. • 1 = Connection not running
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the prognostics
reached.
threshold is reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is detected, and
when a distinct diagnostic condition transitions from detected to not -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module power-up.
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 (-1) to 1
skipping zero.
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current safety input value.
• 1 = On
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Bad data (faulted) or set to Not Used
Indicates one of the following: If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to
• The channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in the correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
Ptxx.Fault BOOL application. IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. change to 1 is removed, you must complete the steps
described in Safety Input Fault Recovery on page 130 to reset
• The channel is set to Not Used. this tag to 0.
If the tag is 1 because the channel is set to Not Used, no
action is required.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree of This tag is set to 1 when the module has reached a critical
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL inaccuracy is not known. operating temperature or is higher the acceptable operating
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. temperature.
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = No short circuit
Ptxx.ShortCircuit BOOL Indicates a short circuit.
• 1 = Short circuit
• 0 = Bad, causing a fault
Ptxx.Status BOOL Indicates the status of the channel.
• 1 = Good

250 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

Table 93 - 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK Module Input Tags

Data Definition
Name Valid Values
Type
• 0 = 24V DC power is not present
Testxx.Readback BOOL Indicates that a 24V DC power source is present at the test output.
• 1 = 24V DC power is present
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Bad data (faulted) or set to Not Used
Indicates one of the following: If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to
correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
• The channel data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in the IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to
Testxx.Fault BOOL application. change to 1 is removed, you must complete the steps
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. described in Safety Input Fault Recovery on page 130 to reset
• The channel is set to Not Used.
this tag to 0.(1)
If the tag is 1 because the channel is set to Not Used, no
action is required.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but the degree of This tag is set to 1 when the module has reached a critical
Testxx.Uncertain BOOL inaccuracy is not known. operating temperature or is higher the acceptable operating
For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting on page 67. temperature.
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to
change to 1 is removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = No short circuit
Testxx.ShortCircuit BOOL Indicates an output short circuit
• 1 = Short circuit
• 0 = No field power off condition
Testxx.FieldPowerOff BOOL Indicates that a field power loss condition exists on the channel.
• 1 = Field power off condition
• 0 = Fault
Testxx.Status BOOL Indicates the channel status.
• 1 = Good
(1) If the Point Mode for the test output is Pulse Test or Power Supply when the Short Circuit condition is detected, the condition can be corrected but you cannot set the test output to a safe state.

Output Tags
Table 94 describes the 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK module output tags.
Table 94 - 5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK Module Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Off
Mutingxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current muting value
• 1 = On

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 251

Appendix B Module Tag Definitions

5069-OBV8S and This section describes the tags that are associated with the 5069-OBV8S or
5069-OBV8SK Module Tags 5069-OBV8SK module.

Safety Modules
Input Tags
Table 95 describes the 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK module input tags.

Table 95 - 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Module Input Tags

Name Data Type Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Module’s operating state
• 1 = Run
Indicates if a connection is running.
The module sets this tag to 0 when connected. If the • 0 = Connection is working
ConnectionFaulted BOOL module is not connected, the controller overwrites the • 1 = Connection is not working
tag to 1.
• 0 = No diagnostics active
Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the
DiagnosticActive BOOL • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the prognostics threshold is
prognostics threshold is reached.
reached
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition
is detected, and when a distinct diagnostic condition -128…+127
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT transitions from detected to not detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module power-up.
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from
255 (-1) to 1 skipping zero.
Indicates that a 24V DC power source is connected to the •
0 = 24V DC power is not present
Ptxx.Readback BOOL output circuit •
1 = 24V DC power is present
•
0 = Good data
Indicates one of the following: •
1 = Bad data (faulted) or set to Not Used
• The channel data is inaccurate and cannot be If the tag is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to correct the
trusted for use in the application. cause of the inaccuracy.
Ptxx.Fault BOOL IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change to 1 is
For more information, see Module Data
Quality Reporting on page 67. removed, you must complete the steps described in Safety Output Fault
Recovery on page 142 to reset this tag to 0.
• The channel is set to Not Used. If the tag is 1 because the channel is set to Not Used, no action is
required.
• 0 = Good data
Indicates that the channel data can be inaccurate but • 1 = Uncertain data
the degree of inaccuracy is not known. This tag is set to 1 when the module has reached a critical operating
Ptxx.Uncertain BOOL For more information, see Module Data Quality Reporting temperature or is higher the acceptable operating temperature.
on page 67. • IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to change to 1 is
removed, the tag automatically resets to 0.
Indicates that the signal wire has been disconnected
from one of its terminals or the RTB has been removed. • 10==Fault
No Fault
Ptxx.NoLoad BOOL
Used with Output points.
• 0 = No short circuit
Ptxx.ShortCircuit BOOL Indicates a short circuit
• 1 = Short circuit
Indicates that a field power loss condition exists on the • 0 = No field power off condition
Ptxx.FieldPowerOff BOOL channel. • 1 = Field power off condition
• 0 = Bad, causing fault
Ptxx.Status BOOL Indicates the channel status.
• 1 = Good

Output Tags
Table 96 describes the 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK module output tags.
Table 96 - 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Module Output Tags
Name Size Definition Valid Values
• 0 = Off
Ptxx.Data BOOL Indicates the current output value.
• 1 = On

252 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix C

Application and Wiring Examples for

Safety Modules

Topic Page
Before You Begin 253
Connection Details 254
5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK Module Wiring Diagrams 256
5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Module Wiring Diagrams 259
Wiring Faults on Safety Modules 266

This appendix provides example wiring diagrams for the Compact 5000™ I/O
safety modules that can be used in functional safety applications.

The wiring configuration affects the safety application level to which a

Compact 5000 I/O safety module is suitable.

IMPORTANT This section shows example wiring diagrams on the 5069-IB8S safety
input module and the 5069-OBV8S safety output module.
The same diagrams also apply when you use the 5069-IB8SK safety
input module and the 5069-OBV8SK safety output module, respectively.

Before You Begin Before you wire your module, remember the following:

A system can have multiple SA power buses. You use 5069-FPD field potential
distributors to establish a new SA power bus. SA power buses are isolated from
each other.

The SA power to adjacent SA Power electrical isolation that the 5069-FPD field
potential distributor provides has a rating of 240V AC (continuous) reinforced
insulation type.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 253

Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

Connection Details Table 97 shows the input device connection methods and their respective
safety categories.

IMPORTANT You must use an SELV/PELV-listed power supply with the safety modules.

Table 97 - Input Device Connection Methods

Test Pulse from
Connected Device Test Output Connection Schematic Diagram(1) Safety Category

Connect the device between a 24V DC

No 1
power supply and the safety input.
24V DC Safety Input x
Push button

Connect the device between the safety

input and the test output. Safety Input x
Yes 2
You must configure the test output as
Safety Test Pulse.

Test Output x

Safety Input x
Connect devices between the safety
inputs and a test output. Safety Input x
The test output must be connected to a
24V DC power supply.

No 3
Test Output x
Emergency stop button
Door monitoring switch

Connect devices between a 24V DC Safety Input x

SELV/PELV-listed power supply and the
safety inputs. 24V DC
Safety Input x

Safety Input x

Connect devices between the safety Safety Input x

Yes 4
inputs and the test outputs.
Test Output x

Test Output x

254 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

Table 97 - Input Device Connection Methods

Test Pulse from
Connected Device Test Output Connection Schematic Diagram(1) Safety Category

Connect the device between a 24V DC

No 24V DC Safety Input x
power supply and the safety input.
Single-channel SIL 3 device

Connect device between the safety Safety Input x

inputs and a test output.
Yes The test output must be connected to a
24V DC power supply.

Test Output x

OSSD1 Safety Input x

Light curtain Light
Connect light curtain to consecutive Curtain
OSSD2 3 or 4
safety inputs, respectively, for example, Safety Input x
Based on the
Yes Safety Inputs 0 and 1. light curtain that
Connect the 24V DC SELV/PELV-listed
+ is being used.
power supply.
24V DC
–
COMMON

(1) X represents the channel number.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 255

Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

5069-IB8S or 5069-IB8SK When the module is wired as shown, it is suitable for applications that are
Module Wiring Diagrams rated up to, and including, Category 3 as defined in ISO 13849-1.

Important:
• The switches are suitable for applications that are rated
up to, and including, SIL CL 3, PLe, Cat. 3.
• The light curtain is suitable for applications that are
rated up to, and including, SIL CL 3, PLe, Cat. 4.

Channel Connections
The diagram shows devices that are connected to safety
input channels 0, 1, 6, and 7. You are not restricted to using
only those channels.
You can connect devices to any safety input channel or
combination of channels as needed.
Safety Input 0
Safety Input 1
SA Power
Connections to an external power supply that provides SA Safety Input 2
power via the SA Power RTB on one of the following: Safety Input 3
• Compact GuardLogix® 5380 controller
• 5069-AENTR or 5069-AEN2TR EtherNet/IP™ Adapter Safety Input 4
• 5069-FPD field potential distributor
Safety Input 5
IMPORTANT: Remember the following:
• The 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules use DC SA + OSSD1 Safety Input 6
power. You must connect DC power to the component, 24V DC SELV/PELV- Light
that is, controller, adapter, or field potential distributor, listed power supply Curtain OSSD2 Safety Input 7
that provides SA Power to the modules. –
Test Output 0
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power
and DC SA power, you must install them on separate SA Test Output 0
power buses.
Test Output 1
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to
establish a new SA Power bus in a system. SA Power Test Output 1
buses are isolated from each other. To keep the
Test Output/Muting Output 2
modules on separate SA Power buses, complete the
following steps. Test Output/Muting Output 2
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for
example DC, to the right of the adapter or controller, Test Output/Muting Output 3
that is, the first SA Power bus. Test Output/Muting Output 3
2. Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to
establish a second SA Power bus. COM
3. Install the modules that use the other type of SA COM
power, for example AC, on the second SA Power bus.
• The SA Power to adjacent SA Power electrical isolation
that the 5069-FPD field potential distributor provides has
a rating of 240V AC (continuous) reinforced insulation
type.

256 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

When the module is wired as shown, and the requirements listed are met in
the project of the safety controller, it is suitable for applications that are rated
up to, and including, Category 4 as defined in ISO 13849-1. To achieve that
suitability rating, you may have to perform diagnostic testing and monitoring
of the safety function.

One diagnostic test method is to configure the safety input channel for Safety
Pulse Test to test the circuit for short circuits to 24V DC. Safety input pairs
must be associated with different Test Output sources.

Channel Connections
The diagram shows devices that are connected to safety
input channels 0 and 1, and to test outputs 0 and 1.
You are not restricted to using only those safety input
channels.
You can connect devices to any channel or combination of
channels as needed.

SA Power
Connections to an external power supply that provides SA
power via the SA Power RTB on one of the following:
• Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller Safety Input 0
• 5069-AENTR or 5069-AEN2TR EtherNet/IP Adapter
• 5069-FPD field potential distributor Safety Input 1
IMPORTANT: Remember the following:
Safety Input 2
• The 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules use DC SA
power. You must connect DC power to the component, Safety Input 3
that is, controller, adapter, or field potential distributor,
Safety Input 4
that provides SA Power to the modules.
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power Safety Input 5
and DC SA power, you must install them on separate SA
power buses. Safety Input 6
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to Safety Input 7
establish a new SA Power bus in a system. SA Power
buses are isolated from each other. To keep the Test Output 0
modules on separate SA Power buses, complete the
Test Output 0
following steps.
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for Test Output 1
example DC, to the right of the adapter or controller,
Test Output 1
that is, the first SA Power bus.
2. Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to Test Output/Muting Output 2
establish a second SA Power bus.
3. Install the modules that use the other type of SA Test Output/Muting Output 2
power, for example AC, on the second SA Power bus. Test Output/Muting Output 3
Test Output/Muting Output 3
Muting
Lamp COM

IMPORTANT: When the power supply and muting lamp are COM
configured for a test output, you must connect the return
wire on the device to a COM point on the module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 257

Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

When the module is wired as shown, and the requirements listed are met in
the project of the safety controller, it is suitable for applications that are rated
up to, and including, Category 3 as defined in ISO 13849-1.
To achieve that suitability rating, you must meet the following requirements:
• Fault Exclusion is External Wiring fault.
• Use a SIL CL 3, PLd, Cat. 3 qualified sensor.
• One of the following configuration combinations:
– Input Point Mode = Safety Pulse Test
– Test Output Mode = Pulse Test
– Input Point Mode = Safety
– Test Output Mode = Power Supply
Channel Connections
The diagram shows devices that are connected to safety
input channel 0 and test output channel 0. You are not
restricted to using only those channels.
You can connect devices to any safety input channel or
combination of channels as needed.
We recommend that you connect even-numbered input
points to even-numbered test output points and odd-
numbered input points to odd-numbered test output points.
This wiring practice can maximize diagnostic independence
and separation. SIL CL 3, PLd, Cat. 3 qualified sensor

SA Power Safety Input 0

Connections to an external power supply that provides SA
power via the SA Power RTB on one of the following: Safety Input 1
• Compact GuardLogix 5380 controller Safety Input 2
• 5069-AENTR or 5069-AEN2TR EtherNet/IP Adapter
• 5069-FPD field potential distributor Safety Input 3
IMPORTANT: Remember the following:
Safety Input 4
• The 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules use DC SA
power. You must connect DC power to the component, Safety Input 5
that is, controller, adapter, or field potential distributor,
Safety Input 6
that provides SA Power to the modules.
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power Safety Input 7
and DC SA power, you must install them on separate SA
power buses. Test Output 0
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to Test Output 0
establish a new SA Power bus in a system. SA Power
buses are isolated from each other. To keep the modules Test Output 1
on separate SA Power buses, complete the following
Test Output 1
steps.
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for Test Output/Muting Output 2
example DC, to the right of the adapter or controller,
Test Output/Muting Output 2
that is, the first SA Power bus.
2. Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to Test Output/Muting Output 3
establish a second SA Power bus.
3. Install the modules that use the other type of SA Test Output/Muting Output 3
power, for example AC, on the second SA Power bus. COM
• The SA Power to adjacent SA Power electrical isolation
that the 5069-FPD field potential distributor provides has COM
a rating of 240V AC (continuous) reinforced insulation
type.

258 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

5069-OBV8S and You can use the safety output modules in Bipolar mode or Sourcing mode.
5069-OBV8SK Module
Wiring Diagrams Bipolar Mode
When the module is wired as shown, and the requirements listed are met in
the project of the safety controller, it is suitable for applications that are rated
up to, and including, Category 4 as defined in ISO 13849-1.
To achieve that suitability rating, you may have to perform diagnostic testing
and monitoring of the safety function. One diagnostic test method is to
configure the safety output channel for Safety Pulse Test to test the circuit for
short circuits to 24V DC.
• We strongly recommend that you connect separate shielded cables to the
P terminal and the N terminal to reduce the possibility of a wire short
between the terminals. If a wire-short fault is detected across the PN
pair, the module outputs are turned off, but the actuator that is
connected to it remains on.
• Configure the application so that No Load and Overload conditions are
only detectable at the P terminal.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 259

Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

For Cat.4 applications, if your application remains in safe state, that is, the
output is off, for a prolonged duration, we recommend that you take one of the
following actions:
• Apply output monitoring at the actuator. The monitoring can be direct or
indirect.
• Limit the safe state to no more than 24 hours.
• Conduct functional test if safe state dwell time increases.

Actuator LA Power
In this wiring configuration, you must connect the LA+ terminal to an
SELV/PELV-listed power supply.
The LA+ and LA- on the actuator must be connected to the same power
supply as the LA+ and LA- on the module.

Connection Pairs
The terminals for each channel function as a Bipolar connection pair when
LA +
you use a 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OB8VSK module in Bipolar switching mode.
For example, the Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing) terminal and Safety Output
0 N (Sinking) terminal are a Bipolar connection pair. That is, they are a PN
pair. K1
When the module is in Bipolar switching mode, you must connect the Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing)
device to both terminals.
Safety Output 0 N (Sinking)
Channel Connections K2 Safety Output 1 P (Sourcing)
This wiring example shows connections to the PN pair for Safety Output 0.
You are not limited to using channel 0 in this mode. You can use all Safety Output 1 N (Sinking)
channel pairs as determined by your application. Safety Output 2 P (Sourcing)
LA –
M Safety Output 2 N (Sinking)
LA Power
The Local Actuator (LA+ and LA –) power connections are used to supply Safety Output 3 P (Sourcing)
field-side power to the module.
Safety Output 3 N (Sinking)
• The 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules do not draw current
from the SA Power bus. Safety Output 4 P (Sourcing)
Still, the modules are DC-type modules and you must install them on a
Safety Output 4 N (Sinking)
DC SA Power bus.
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power and DC SA Safety Output 5 P (Sourcing)
power, you must install them on separate SA power buses.
Safety Output 5 N (Sinking)
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a new SA
Power bus in a system. SA Power buses are isolated from each other. Safety Output 6 P (Sourcing)
To keep the modules on separate SA Power buses, complete the
Safety Output 6 N (Sinking)
following steps.
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for example DC, to Safety Output 7 P (Sourcing)
the right of the adapter or controller, that is, the first SA Power bus.
Safety Output 7 N (Sinking)
2. Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a second
SA Power bus. 24V DC + LA +
3. Install the modules that use the other type of SA power, for SELV/PELV-listed
– LA –
example AC, on the second SA Power bus. power supply
• We strongly recommend that, if you have a direct connection
between the safety output module and an input module and those
modules are powered by separate power supplies, that you connect
SA- and LA- together. This practice helps to reduce the risk of
grounding float from disrupting diagnostics.

260 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

When the module is wired as shown, and the requirements listed are met in
the project of the safety controller, it is suitable for applications that are rated
up to, and including, Category 4 as defined in ISO 13849-1.
To achieve that suitability rating, you may have to perform diagnostic testing
and monitoring of the safety function. One diagnostic test method is to
configure the safety output channel for Safety Pulse Test to test the circuit for
short circuits to 24V DC. Configure the application so that a No Load fault can
only be detected if the wires from both the P- terminal and the N- terminal are
disconnected.

For Cat.4 applications, if your application remains in safe state, that is, the
output is off, for a prolonged duration, we recommend that you take one of the
following actions:
• Apply output monitoring at the actuator. The monitoring can be direct or
indirect.
• Limit the safe state to no more than 24 hours.
• Conduct functional test if safe state dwell time increases.
Connection Pairs
The terminals for each channel function as a Bipolar connection pair
when you use a 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OB8VSK module in Bipolar switching
mode. For example, the Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing) terminal and Safety
Output 0 N (Sinking) terminal are a Bipolar connection pair. That is, they
are a PN pair.
When the module is in Bipolar switching mode, you must connect the
device to both terminals.

Channel Connections
This wiring example shows connections to the PN pair for Safety Output 0.
You are not limited to using channel 0 in this mode. You can use all K1
channel pairs as determined by your application. Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing)
Safety Output 0 N (Sinking)
LA Power
The Local Actuator (LA+ and LA –) power connections are used to supply K2 Safety Output 1 P (Sourcing)
field-side power to the module. Safety Output 1 N (Sinking)
• The 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules do not draw current
from the SA Power bus. Safety Output 2 P (Sourcing)
Still, the modules are DC type modules, and you must install them on a M Safety Output 2 N (Sinking)
DC SA Power bus.
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power and DC SA Safety Output 3 P (Sourcing)
power, you must install them on separate SA power buses. Safety Output 3 N (Sinking)
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a new SA
Power bus in a system. SA Power buses are isolated from each other. Safety Output 4 P (Sourcing)
To keep the modules on separate SA Power buses, complete the Safety Output 4 N (Sinking)
following steps.
Safety Output 5 P (Sourcing)
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for example DC, to
the right of the adapter or controller, that is, the first SA Power bus. Safety Output 5 N (Sinking)
2. Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a second
Safety Output 6 P (Sourcing)
SA Power bus.
3. Install the modules that use the other type of SA power, for Safety Output 6 N (Sinking)
example AC, on the second SA Power bus. Safety Output 7 P (Sourcing)
• We strongly recommend that, if you have a direct connection
between the safety output module and an input module and those Safety Output 7 N (Sinking)
modules are powered by separate power supplies, that you connect 24V DC + LA +
SA- and LA- together. This practice helps to reduce the risk of SELV/PELV-listed
– LA –
grounding float from disrupting diagnostics. power supply

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 261

Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

When the module is wired as shown, and the requirements listed are met in
the project of the safety controller, it is suitable for applications that are rated
up to, and including, Category 4 as defined in ISO 13849-1. To achieve that
suitability rating, you may have to perform diagnostic testing and monitoring
of the safety function. One diagnostic test method is to configure the safety
output channel for Safety Pulse Test to test the circuit for short circuits to
24V DC.

For Cat.4 applications, if your application remains in safe state, that is, the
output is off, for a prolonged duration, we recommend that you take one of the
following actions:
• Apply output monitoring at the actuator. The monitoring can be direct or
indirect.
• Limit the safe state to no more than 24 hours.
• Conduct functional test if safe state dwell time increases.
• A qualified actuator must be installed, for example, in accordance with
IEC 60947.
Connection Pairs
The terminals for each channel function as a Bipolar connection pair when you
use a 5069-OBV8S or 5069-OB8VSK module in Bipolar switching mode. For
example, the Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing) terminal and Safety Output 0 N
(Sinking) terminal are a Bipolar connection pair. That is, they are a PN pair.
When the module is in Bipolar switching mode, you must connect the device to
both terminals.

Channel Connections
This wiring example shows connections to the PN pair for Safety Output 0. You
are not limited to using channel 0 in this mode. You can use all channel pairs Cat. 4 Actuator
as determined by your application. Subsystem
Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing)
LA Power Safety Output 0 N (Sinking)
The Local Actuator (LA+ and LA –) power connections are used to supply
field-side power to the module. Safety Output 1 P (Sourcing)
• The 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules do not draw current from Safety Output 1 N (Sinking)
the SA Power bus.
Still, the modules are DC type modules, and you must install them on a DC Safety Output 2 P (Sourcing)
SA Power bus Safety Output 2 N (Sinking)
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power and DC SA power,
you must install them on separate SA power buses. Safety Output 3 P (Sourcing)
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a new SA Power Safety Output 3 N (Sinking)
bus in a system. SA Power buses are isolated from each other. To keep the
Safety Output 4 P (Sourcing)
modules on separate SA Power buses, complete the following steps.
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for example DC, to the Safety Output 4 N (Sinking)
right of the adapter or controller, that is, the first SA Power bus.
Safety Output 5 P (Sourcing)
2. Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a second SA
Power bus. Safety Output 5 N (Sinking)
3. Install the modules that use the other type of SA power, for example AC,
Safety Output 6 P (Sourcing)
on the second SA Power bus.
• We strongly recommend that if, you have a direct connection between Safety Output 6 N (Sinking)
the safety output module and an input module and those modules are
Safety Output 7 P (Sourcing)
powered by separate power supplies, that you connect SA- and LA-
together. This practice helps to reduce the risk of grounding float from Safety Output 7 N (Sinking)
disrupting diagnostics. 24V DC + LA +
• The SA Power to adjacent SA Power electrical isolation that the 5069-FPD SELV/PELV-listed
field potential distributor provides has a rating of 240V AC (continuous) LA –
power supply –
reinforced insulation type.

262 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

Sourcing Mode
When the module is wired as shown, it is suitable for applications that are
rated up to, and including, Category 2 as defined in ISO 13849-1.

To achieve that suitability rating, you may have to perform diagnostic testing
and monitoring of the safety function. One diagnostic test method is to
configure the safety output channel for Safety Pulse Test to test the circuit for
short circuits to 24V DC.

Channel Connections
This wiring example shows connection to Safety Output 0. You
are not limited to using channel 0 in this mode. You can use all
channels as determined by your application.

LA Power
The Local Actuator (LA+ and LA –) power connections are used
to supply field-side power to the module. Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing)
• The 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules do not draw K
Safety Output 0 N (Sinking)
current from the SA Power bus.
Still, the modules are DC type modules, and you must install Safety Output 1 P (Sourcing)
them on a DC SA Power bus
Safety Output 1 N (Sinking)
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power and
DC SA power, you must install them on separate SA power Safety Output 2 P (Sourcing)
M
buses. LA – Safety Output 2 N (Sinking)
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a
new SA Power bus in a system. SA Power buses are Safety Output 3 P (Sourcing)
isolated from each other. To keep the modules on separate Safety Output 3 N (Sinking)
SA Power buses, complete the following steps.
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for Safety Output 4 P (Sourcing)
example DC, to the right of the adapter or controller, Safety Output 4 N (Sinking)
that is, the first SA Power bus.
2. Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to Safety Output 5 P (Sourcing)
establish a second SA Power bus. Safety Output 5 N (Sinking)
3. Install the modules that use the other type of SA power,
for example AC, on the second SA Power bus. Safety Output 6 P (Sourcing)
• We strongly recommend that, if you have a direct Safety Output 6 N (Sinking)
connection between the safety output module and an input
module and those modules are powered by separate Safety Output 7 P (Sourcing)
power supplies, that you connect SA- and LA- together. Safety Output 7 N (Sinking)
This practice helps to reduce the risk of grounding float
24V DC + LA +
from disrupting diagnostics.
SELV/PELV-listed
power supply – LA –

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 263

Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

When the module is wired as shown, it is suitable for applications that are
rated up to, and including, Category 4 as defined in ISO 13849-1.

To achieve that suitability rating, you may have to perform diagnostic testing
and monitoring of the safety function. One diagnostic test method is to
configure the safety output channel for Safety Pulse Test to test the circuit for
short circuits to 24V DC.

For Cat.4 applications, if your application remains in safe state, that is, the
output is off, for a prolonged duration, we recommend that you take one of
these actions:
• Apply output monitoring at the actuator. The monitoring can be direct or
indirect.
• Limit the safe state to no more than 24 hours.
• Conduct functional test if safe state dwell time increases.
Connection Pairs
When you use dual-channel sourcing wiring on the 5069-OBV8S or
5069-OBV8SK module, you must connect the devices to dual-channel
connection pairs. For example, the devices are connected to channels
4 and 5 because they are a connection pair. The following channels
are dual-channel connection pairs:
• Channels 0 and 1 (shown)
• Channels 2 and 3
• Channels 4 and 5
• Channels 6 and 7

Channel Connections
This wiring example shows connections to Safety Output 0 P and
Safety Output 1P. You are not limited to using channels 0 and 1 in this K1
mode. You can use all channel pairs as determined by your
Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing)
application.
Safety Output 0 N (Sinking)
LA Power Safety Output 1 P (Sourcing)
The Local Actuator (LA+ and LA –) power connections are used to K2
supply field-side power to the module. Safety Output 1 N (Sinking)
• The 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules do not draw current Safety Output 2 P (Sourcing)
from the SA Power bus.
Still, the modules are DC-type modules and you must install them on Safety Output 2 N (Sinking)
a DC SA Power bus. M Safety Output 3 P (Sourcing)
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power and DC SA
Safety Output 3 N (Sinking)
power, you must install them on separate SA power buses. LA –
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a new SA Safety Output 4 P (Sourcing)
Power bus in a system. SA Power buses are isolated from each
Safety Output 4 N (Sinking)
other. To keep the modules on separate SA Power buses, complete
the following steps. Safety Output 5 P (Sourcing)
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for example DC,
Safety Output 5 N (Sinking)
to the right of the adapter or controller, that is, the first SA
Power bus. Safety Output 6 P (Sourcing)
2. Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a
Safety Output 6 N (Sinking)
second SA Power bus.
3. Install the modules that use the other type of SA power, for Safety Output 7 P (Sourcing)
example AC, on the second SA Power bus.
Safety Output 7 N (Sinking)
• We strongly recommend that, if you have a direct connection
between the safety output module and an input module and those 24V DC + LA +
modules are powered by separate power supplies, that you connect SELV/PELV-listed
– LA –
SA- and LA- together. This practice helps to reduce the risk of power supply
grounding float from disrupting diagnostics.

When the module is wired as shown on page 266, and the requirements listed
are met in the project of the safety controller, it is suitable for applications that
are rated up to, and including, Category 4 as defined in ISO 13849-1.

264 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

To achieve that suitability rating, you may have to perform diagnostic testing
and monitoring of the safety function. One diagnostic test method is to
configure the safety output channel for Safety Pulse Test to test the circuit for
short circuits to 24V DC.

• All power source cables must be installed separately, for example, with a
separate cable duct or shielded cable. Power source cables are connections to
the MOD+, SA+, or LA+ terminals.

Otherwise, a Short Circuit condition between SA+ and P can be detected and
the output is turned off but the actuator that is connected to it remains on.

• You must connect two ground terminals. Otherwise, the maximum residual
current at signal 0 cannot be maintained if only one ground line is connected
and it is interrupted.

For more information on residual current, see the Compact 5000 I/O Modules
and EtherNet/IP™ Adapters Technical Data, publication 5069-TD001

• A qualified actuator must be installed, for example, in accordance with

IEC 60947.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 265

Appendix C Application and Wiring Examples for Safety Modules

For Cat.4 applications, if your application remains in safe state, that is, the
output is off, for a prolonged duration, we recommend that you take one of the
following actions:
• Apply output monitoring at the actuator. The monitoring can be direct or
indirect.
• Limit the safe state to no more than 24 hours.
• Conduct functional test if safe state dwell time increases.

Channel Connections
This wiring example shows connections to Safety Output 0.
You are not limited to using channel 0 in this mode. You can
use all channels as determined by your application.

Cat. 4 Actuator
Subsystem
LA Power
The Local Actuator (LA+ and LA –) power connections are used Safety Output 0 P (Sourcing)
to supply field-side power to the module. Safety Output 0 N (Sinking)
• The 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules do not draw
current from the SA Power bus. Safety Output 1 P (Sourcing)
Still, the modules are DC type modules, and you must install Safety Output 1 N (Sinking)
them on a DC SA Power bus
• If you install modules in a system that use AC SA power and Safety Output 2 P (Sourcing)
LA –
DC SA power, you must install them on separate SA power Safety Output 2 N (Sinking)
buses.
• You use a 5069-FPD field potential distributor to establish a Safety Output 3 P (Sourcing)
new SA Power bus in a system. SA Power buses are Safety Output 3 N (Sinking)
isolated from each other. To keep the modules on separate
Safety Output 4 P (Sourcing)
SA Power buses, complete the following steps.
1.Install the modules that use one type of SA power, for Safety Output 4 N (Sinking)
example DC, to the right of the adapter or controller,
Safety Output 5 P (Sourcing)
that is, the first SA Power bus.
2. Install the 5069-FPD field potential distributor to Safety Output 5 N (Sinking)
establish a second SA Power bus.
Safety Output 6 P (Sourcing)
3. Install the modules that use the other type of SA power,
for example AC, on the second SA Power bus. Safety Output 6 N (Sinking)
• We strongly recommend that, if you have a direct
Safety Output 7 P (Sourcing)
connection between the safety output module and an input
module and those modules are powered by separate Safety Output 7 N (Sinking)
power supplies, that you connect SA- and LA- together. 24V DC + LA +
This practice helps to reduce the risk of grounding float SELV/PELV-listed
from disrupting diagnostics. power supply – LA –

Wiring Faults on A number of conditions can cause wiring faults on safety modules. We
Safety Modules strongly recommend that you monitor your application to detect wiring faults
as soon as they appear so you can troubleshoot and remedy the cause of the
fault.

Examples of wiring fault causes include the following:

• Field Power Loss condition
• No Load condition
• Wiring short to power
• Wiring short across outputs

266 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix D

Safety Data for Safety Modules

Topic Page
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Input Module Safety Data 268
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module Safety Data 269

This appendix lists calculated values for probability of a dangerous failure on

demand (PFD), average frequency of a dangerous failure per hour (PFH), and
mean time to failure (MTTF). PFD and PFH calculations comply with
IEC61508, edition 2, 2010.

Calculated values of PFD and PFH appear in Table 98 on page 268 for the
5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules and Table 99 on page 269 for the
5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules. PFD and PFH must be calculated for
the devices within the system to comply with the SIL level that is required for
application.

You are responsible for following the requirements of ISO 13849-1:20015, to

assess Performance Levels in your safety system.

You must functionally test every I/O module. To functionally test the modules,
complete the following tasks:
• Input points - Toggle every input point, and verify that the system
detects the input state change within the safety reaction time (SRT).
• Output points - Use the controller to toggle every output point, and verify
that the output point changes state.

SRT is a consideration of delays or latencies within the safety system.

For more information, see the GuardLogix® 5580 and Compact GuardLogix
5380 Controller Systems Safety Reference Manual (TÜV), publication
1756-RM012.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 267

Appendix D Safety Data for Safety Modules

Compact 5000 I/O Safety Table 98 lists the safety data for the 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules.
Input Module Safety Data
Table 98 - 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK Module Safety Parameter Data
Point Operation Type
Attribute Dual Channel
Single Channel (at controller instruction level)
Safety Function Architecture 0 1
Safe Failure Rate (s) [failures/hr] 1.16E-06 1.49E-06
Dangerous Failure Rate (D) [failures/hr] 7.38E-07 1.04E-06
Dangerous Detected Failure Rate (DD) [failures/hr] 7.37E-07 1.04E-06
Dangerous Undetected Failure Rate (DU) [failures/hr] 3.18E-10 2.54E-10
Safety Reaction Time, SRT [millisecond] 6
Automatic Diagnostic Test Interval (TD) [hr] 4
Useful Life [yr] 20
Systematic Capability (SC) 3
Safe Failure Fraction (SFF) [%] 99.98% 99.99%
PFH 3.18E-10 2.54E-10
PFDAVE 10 yrs 1.39E-05 1.11E-05
Mission Time 20 yrs 2.78E-05 2.22E-05
Diagnostic Coverage Average (DCAVE) 99.96% 99.98%
Spurious Trip Rate (STR) 3.65E-06 4.52E-06
MTTF [years] 60.05 45.25
MTTFD [years] 154.75 110.10
Added Pulse Testing Statement

268 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix D Safety Data for Safety Modules

Safety Reaction Time - 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK Modules

Safety reaction time of Compact 5000™ I/O safety input modules is defined
as follows:
• SRT on Demand - The response time interval between a signal change on
the input terminal and producing or providing the safety packet on the
backplane.
• SRT on Fault - The response time between the occurrence of an internal
fault in the channel/module and the channel/module going into a
safe state.
• SRT on External Wiring Fault - The response time between the
occurrences of an external wiring fault and the channels going into a safe
state when the channels are in Safety Pulse Test mode.
The following table lists SRT times for the Compact 5000 I/O safety
input modules.
Module is NOT used in continuous Module is used in continuous demand mode
Safety Reaction Time demand mode AND the safety demand OR the safety demand rate is more than or
rate is less than once per 1.5 s equal to once per 1.5 s
on demand 6 ms
on fault 6 ms 14.3 ms
on external wiring fault 102 ms

The times in the previous table are subjected to an RPI of 2 ms, Input Delay of 0 ms
and Number of Input connections of 1.
For different RPI values, extend the timing by the RPI value. For additional number of
Input connections, extend the timing by 0.14 ms for each addition.

Compact 5000 I/O Safety Table 99 lists the safety data for the 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules.
Output Module Safety Data
Table 99 - 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Module Safety Data
Output Mode
Sourcing Bipolar
Attribute
Point Operation Type Point Operation Type
Single Dual Single
Safety Function Architecture 0 1 1
Safe Failure Rate (s) [failures/hr] 1.17E-06 9.45E-07 9.63E-07
Dangerous Failure Rate (D) [failures/hr] 9.13E-07 5.98E-07 6.25E-07
Dangerous Detected Failure Rate (DD) [failures/hr] 9.12E-07 5.97E-07 6.24E-07
Dangerous Undetected Failure Rate (DU) [failures/hr] 3.29E-10 3.15E-10 3.14E-10
Safety Reaction Time, SRT [millisecond] 4.5
Automatic Diagnostic Test Interval (TD) [hr] 4
Useful Life [yr] 20
Systematic Capability (SC) 3
Safe Failure Fraction (SFF) [%] 99.98% 99.98% 99.98%
PFH 3.29E-10 3.15E-10 3.14E-10
PFDAVE 10 yrs 1.44E-05 1.38E-05 1.38E-05
Mission Time 20 yrs 2.89E-05 2.76E-05 2.75E-05
Diagnostic Coverage Average (DCAVE) 99.96% 99.95% 99.95%
Spurious Trip Rate (STR) 3.65E-06 2.34E-06 2.45E-06
MTTF [years] 54.91 74.01 71.89
MTTFD [years] 125.07 190.99 182.70

The safety data provided in the table is with Safety Pulse Test mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 269

Appendix D Safety Data for Safety Modules

Safety Reaction Time - 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK Modules

Safety reaction time of Compact 5000 I/O safety output modules is defined
as follows:
• SRT on Demand - The response time interval between the availability of
the demanded safety output data on the backplane of the module and a
signal change on the output channel that is associated with this demand.
• SRT on Fault - the response time between the occurrence of an internal
fault in the channel/module and the channel/module going into a
safe state.
• SRT on External Wiring Fault - The response time between the
occurrences of an external wiring fault and the channels going into a safe
state when the channels are in Safety Pulse Test mode.

The following table lists SRT times for the Compact 5000 I/O safety
output modules.
Module is NOT used in continuous Module is used in continuous demand
Safety Reaction Time demand mode AND the safety demand mode OR the safety demand rate is more
rate is less than once per 1 s than or equal to once per 1 s
on demand 4 ms
on fault 4.5 ms 8.3 ms
on external wiring fault 200 ms

The times in the previous table are subjected to an RPI of 2 ms and Number of Input
connections of 1.
For different RPI values, extend the timing by the RPI value. For additional number of
Input connections, extend the timing by 0.14 ms for each addition.

270 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix E

Module Diagnostic Assembly

Create User-defined You can use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application to create
Diagnostic Assembly Types user-defined Diagnostic Assembly types for safety I/O modules.

IMPORTANT The members indicated in the tables are arranged according to Data
Alignment Rules of controllers. Strictly follow the Data Type and sequence of
the members that are indicated in the Tables of this Appendix. Data
misalignment after executing ‘Get Attribute Single’ Message (MSG) instruction
may occur if the Data Type and sequence are not followed.

5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK Module

There are total of three Diagnostic Assemblies under these catalogs that
include two different types of Diagnostic Channel. From the Controller
Organizer pane, expand Data Types and create user-defined types for
the module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 271

Appendix E Module Diagnostic Assembly

Diagnostic Assemblies
1. Diagnostic Counters Base I/O Assembly
- DATATYPE: AB:5000_IO:DC:0
- Instance ID: 0x301 (769)
- Size = 16 bytes
Table 100 - Diagnostic Assembly Instance 769
Name Data Type Size in Byte
RunMode BOOL
Reserved1(1) BOOL
DiagnosticActive BOOL
Reserved2 BOOL
1
Reserved3 BOOL
Reserved4 BOOL
Reserved5 BOOL
Reserved6 BOOL
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT 1
CIPConnections INT 2
CIPLostPackets DINT 4
CIPTimeouts DINT 4
CPUUtilization INT 2
Reserved7 INT 2
(1) These data types act as padding to enable byte alignment. They can be renamed.

2. Diagnostic Digital Safety 8 Point Assembly A (input)

- DATATYPE: AB:5000_SDI8_A:D:0
- Instance 0x312 (786)
- Size = 480 bytes
Table 101 - Diagnostic Assembly Instance 786
Name Data Type Size in Byte
RunMode BOOL
Reserved1(1) BOOL
DiagnosticActive BOOL
CIPSyncValid BOOL
1
CIPSyncTimeout BOOL
Reserved2 BOOL
FieldPowerOff BOOL
Reserved3 BOOL
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT 1
Reserved4 SINT 1
Reserved5 SINT 1
Reserved6 SINT[4] 4
LocalClockOffset LINT 8
LocalClockOffsetTimestamp LINT 8
GrandMasterClockID SINT[8] 8
Point0_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0(2) 56
Point1_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0 56
Point2_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0 56
Point3_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0 56
Point4_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0 56
Point5_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0 56
Point6_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0 56
Point7_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0 56
(1) These data types act as padding to enable byte alignment. They can be renamed.
(2) Refer to Table 103 for structure of AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0.

272 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix E Module Diagnostic Assembly

3. Diagnostic Digital Safety 8 Point Assembly B (input)

- DATATYPE: AB:5000_SDI8_B:D:0
- Instance ID: 0x39F (927)
- Size = 192 bytes
Table 102 - Diagnostic Assembly Instance 927
Name Data Type Size in Byte
Point0_SafetyReadback (1) 48
AB:5000_SafetyReadback_Channel:D:0
Point1_SafetyReadback AB:5000_SafetyReadback_Channel:D:0 48
Point2_SafetyReadback AB:5000_SafetyReadback_Channel:D:0 48
Point3_SafetyReadback AB:5000_SafetyReadback_Channel:D:0 48
(1) Refer to Table 104 for structure of AB:5000_SafetyReadback_Channel:D:0.

Diagnostic Channel

The following Data Types need to be retrieved as part of the Diagnostic

Assemblies Instance.
1. Diagnostic Digital Diag Safety Channel (input)
- DATATYPE: AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0
- Size = 56 bytes
Table 103 - Structure for AB:5000_SDI_Diag_Channel:D:0 data type
Name Data Type Size in Byte
Reserved1(1) BOOL
Fault BOOL
Uncertain BOOL
Reserved2 BOOL
1
ShortCircuit BOOL
Reserved3 BOOL
FieldPowerOff BOOL
Reserved4 BOOL
Reserved5 SINT 1
InternalFault BOOL
OverTemperature BOOL
CriticalTemperature BOOL
Reserved6 BOOL
1
Reserved7 BOOL
Reserved8 BOOL
Reserved9 BOOL
Reserved10 BOOL
Reserved11 SINT 1
Reserved12 SINT[4] 4
ShortCircuitTimestamp LINT 8
InternalFaultTimestamp LINT 8
FieldPowerOnTimestamp LINT 8
FieldPowerOffTimestamp LINT 8
OverTemperatureTimestamp LINT 8
CriticalTemperatureTimestamp LINT 8
(1) These data types act as padding to enable byte alignment. They can be renamed.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 273

Appendix E Module Diagnostic Assembly

2. Diagnostic Safety Readback Channel (output)

- DATATYPE: AB:5000_SafetyReadback_Channel:D:0
- Size = 48 bytes
Table 104 - Structure for AB:5000_SafetyReadback_Channel:D:0 data type
Name Data Type Size in Byte
Reserved1(1) BOOL
Fault BOOL
Uncertain BOOL
Reserved2 BOOL
1
ShortCircuit BOOL
Reserved3 BOOL
FieldPowerOff BOOL
Reserved4 BOOL
Reserved5 SINT 1
InternalFault BOOL
Overload BOOL
Reserved6 BOOL
Reserved7 BOOL
1
Reserved8 BOOL
Reserved9 BOOL
Reserved10 BOOL
Reserved11 BOOL
Reserved12 SINT 1
Reserved13 SINT[4] 4
ShortCircuitTimestamp LINT 8
InternalFaultTimestamp LINT 8
OverloadTimestamp LINT 8
FieldPowerOnTimestamp LINT 8
FieldPowerOffTimestamp LINT 8
(1) These data types act as padding to enable byte alignment. They can be renamed.

274 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix E Module Diagnostic Assembly

5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK Module

There are total of three Diagnostic Assemblies under this catalog and one
Diagnostic Channel. From the Controller Organizer pane, expand Data Types
and create user-defined types for the module.

Diagnostic Assemblies
1. Diagnostic Counters Base I/O Assembly
- DATATYPE: AB:5000_IO:DC:0
- Instance ID: 0x301 (769)
- Size = 16 bytes
Table 105 - Diagnostic Assembly Instance 769
Name Data Type Size in Byte
RunMode BOOL
Reserved1(1) BOOL
DiagnosticActive BOOL
Reserved2 BOOL
1
Reserved3 BOOL
Reserved4 BOOL
Reserved5 BOOL
Reserved6 BOOL
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT 1
CIPConnections INT 2
CIPLostPackets DINT 4
CIPTimeouts DINT 4
CPUUtilization INT 2
Reserved7 INT 2
(1) These data types act as padding to enable byte alignment. They can be renamed.

2. Diagnostic Digital Safety 8 Point Assembly A (input)

- DATATYPE: AB:5000_SDO8_A:D:0
- Instance 0x313 (787)
- Size = 384 bytes
Table 106 - Diagnostic Assembly Instance 787
Name Data Type Size in Byte
RunMode BOOL
Reserved1(1) BOOL
DiagnosticActive BOOL
CIPSyncValid BOOL
1
CIPSyncTimeout BOOL
Reserved2 BOOL
FieldPowerOff BOOL
Reserved3 BOOL
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT 1
Reserved4 SINT 1
Reserved5 SINT 1
Reserved6 SINT[4] 4
LocalClockOffset LINT 8
LocalClockOffsetTimestamp LINT 8
GrandMasterClockID SINT[8] 8
Point0_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0(2) 88
Point1_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0 88
Point2_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0 88
Point3_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0 88
(1) These data types act as padding to enable byte alignment. They can be renamed.
(2) Please refer to Table 108 for structure of AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 275

Appendix E Module Diagnostic Assembly

3. Diagnostic Digital Safety 8 Output Point Assembly B (input)

- DATATYPE: AB:5000_SDO8_B:D:0
- Instance ID: 0x31E (798)
- Size = 352 bytes
Table 107 - Diagnostic Assembly Instance 798
Name Data Type Size in Byte
Point4_Diagnostic (1) 88
AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0
Point5_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0 88
Point6_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0 88
Point7_Diagnostic AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0 88
(1) Please refer to Table 108 for structure of AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0.

276 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix E Module Diagnostic Assembly

Diagnostic Channel

The following Data Types need to be retrieved as part of the Diagnostic

Assemblies Instance.
1. Diagnostic Digital Safety Diag 2 Input Channel (output)
- DATATYPE: AB:5000_SDO_DIAG2_Channel:D:0
- Size = 88 bytes
Table 108 - Structure for AB:5000_SDO_Diag2_Channel:D:0 data type
Name Data Type Size in Byte
(1) BOOL
Reserved1
Fault BOOL
Uncertain BOOL
NoLoad BOOL
1
ShortCircuit BOOL
Reserved2 BOOL
FieldPowerOff BOOL
Reserved3 BOOL
DualChannelFault BOOL
Reserved4 BOOL
Reserved5 BOOL
Reserved7 BOOL 1
Reserved8 BOOL
Reserved9 BOOL
Reserved10 BOOL
InternalFault BOOL
Overload BOOL
ShortCircuitGround BOOL
OverTemperature BOOL
1
CriticalTemperature BOOL
Reserved11 BOOL
Reserved12 BOOL
Reserved13 BOOL
Reserved14 SINT 1
Reserved15 SINT[4] 4
NoLoadTimestamp LINT 8
ShortCircuitTimestamp LINT 8
DualChannelFaultTimestamp LINT 8
InternalFaultTimestamp LINT 8
OverloadTimestamp LINT 8
ShortCircuitGroundTimestamp LINT 8
FieldPowerOnTimestamp LINT 8
FieldPowerOffTimestamp LINT 8
OverTemperatureTimestamp LINT 8
CriticalTemperatureTimestamp LINT 8
(1) These data types act as padding to enable byte alignment. They can be renamed.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 277

Appendix E Module Diagnostic Assembly

Create Message Type Create MESSAGE type user tags for requests and associated response user tags
User Tags for each of the new user-defined diagnostic assembly types.

From the Controller Organizer pane, expand Tasks > MainTask >
MainProgram
1. Create MESSAGE type user tags for each request
2. Create associated response user tags for each new user-defined
diagnostic assembly types.
3. Add the user tags to your ladder program.

4. Expand the message tag to open the message configuration dialog

5. On the Configuration tab, select:
• Service type—Get Attribute Single
• Class—4
• Attribute—3
• Instance

5069-IB8S, 5069- IB8SK:

769 (301h) Diagnostic Counters Base I/O Assembly
786 (312h) Diagnostic Digital Safety 8 Point Assembly A (input)
927 (39Fh) Diagnostic Digital Safety 8 Point Assembly B (input)

5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK:
769 (301h) Diagnostic Counters Base I/O Assembly
787 (313h) Diagnostic Digital Safety 8 Output Point Assembly A (input)
798 (31Eh) Diagnostic Digital Safety 8 Output Point Assembly B (input)

• Destination element—User-defined type suitable for the

instance entered.

6. On the Communication tab, select the path to the module that you wish
to send the messages to.
7. Download the project and set to Run mode.

278 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix E Module Diagnostic Assembly

You can monitor the user defined tag values from the Program Parameters and
Local Tags window, under the MainProgram task in the Controller Organizer
pane.

Definitions for Diagnostic Table 109 describes the members inside Diagnostic Assembly Data Types:
Assembly Types
Table 109 - Definition of members in Diagnostic Assembly Data Types
Data Definition
Name Valid Values
Type
• 0 = Idle
RunMode BOOL Module’s operating state
• 1 = Run
• 0 = No diagnostics active
BOOL Indicates if any diagnostics are active or if the prognostics threshold is
DiagnosticActive • 1 = One or more diagnostics are active or the prognostics
reached.
threshold is reached
• 0 = Module is not synced
CIPSyncValid BOOL Indicates if the module is synced with a 1588 master.
• 1 = Module is synced
• 0 = A valid time master has not timed out.
• 1 = A valid time master was detected on the backplane,
BOOL Indicates if the module was once synced with a 1588 master, but is not
CIPSyncTimeout but the time master has timed out.
now due to a timeout.
The module is using its local clock and can be drifting away
from the last known time master.
• 0 = No field power off condition
FieldPowerOff BOOL Indicates that a field power loss condition exists on the channel.
• 1 = Field power off condition
Increments for each time a distinct diagnostic condition is detected, and
when a distinct diagnostic condition transitions from detected to not 0…255
DiagnosticSequenceCount SINT detected. The value of 0 is skipped except during module
Set to zero by product reset or power cycle. Wraps from 255 (-1) to 1 power-up.
skipping zero.
LINT The offset from the local clock to the system time. This value helps to
LocalClockOffset All
detect steps in time. This value updates when a PTP update is received.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 279

Appendix E Module Diagnostic Assembly

Table 109 - Definition of members in Diagnostic Assembly Data Types

Data Definition
Name Valid Values
Type
Shows the timestamp of the local clock offset in YYYY-MM-DD-
HH:mm:SS_mmm_uuu_nnn(UTC-00:00) format.
• YYYY = year
• MM = month
• DD = day
• HH = hour (24 hour)
LocalClockOffsetTimestamp LINT • mm = minutes A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
• SS = seconds
• mmm = milliseconds
• uuu = microseconds
• nnn = nanoseconds
• UTC-00:00 = Time zone
SINT[8 The EUI-64 Identity of the CIP Sync Grandmaster clock the module is
GrandMasterClockID All
] synced to.
• 0 = Good
• 1 = Bad, causing fault
Indicates that counter data is inaccurate and cannot be trusted for use in If the bit is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to
Fault BOOL the application. correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to
change to 1 is removed, the bit automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = Good data
• 1 = Uncertain data
Indicates that the counter data can be inaccurate but the degree of If the bit is set to 1, you must troubleshoot the module to
Uncertain BOOL inaccuracy is not known. correct the cause of the inaccuracy.
IMPORTANT: Once the condition that causes the tag to
change to 1 is removed, the bit automatically resets to 0.
• 0 = No Load condition does not exist
NoLoad BOOL Shows whether a load fault is present.
• 1 = No Load condition exists.
Shows whether an output short circuit or over-current fault is present on • 0 = No Short Circuit condition exists
ShortCircuit BOOL the point. • 1 = Short Circuit condition exists
• 0 = Field Power is not present
FieldPower BOOL Shows whether field power is present on the point.
• 1 = Field Power is present
• 0 = Good
DualChannelFault BOOL Shows whether a dual channel fault is present.
• 1 = Fault is present
Shows whether an internal fault is present. If there is an internal fault, • 0 = No internal issue found in the product.
InternalFault BOOL cycle power to the module. If the problem persists, contact Technical • 1 = One or more of several internal diagnostics indicate
Support. an internal issue in the product.
• 0 = No Overload condition exists
Overload BOOL Shows whether an overload fault is present on the point.
• 1 = Overload condition exists
• 0 = No Short Circuit To Ground condition exists
ShortCircuitGround BOOL Shows whether a short circuit to ground fault is present on the point.
• 1 = Short Circuit To Ground condition exists
Shows whether an over temperature fault is present. • 0 = No fault.
OverTemperature BOOL Over temperature means the device is at a normal or higher temperature • 1 = Module is at a higher temperature than its rated
than its rated operating limits. operating limits.
Shows whether a critical temperature fault is present. • 0 = No fault.
CriticalTemperature BOOL Critical temperature means the device is above the critical temperature
limit for proper operation and may shut down without further warning. • 1 = Module is above the critical temperature limit
Shows the timestamp of the last no load fault in YYYY-MM-DD-
HH:mm:SS.mmm (UTC-00:00) format.
• YYYY = year
• MM = month
• DD = day
NoLoadTimestamp LINT A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
• HH = hour (24 hour)
• mm = minutes
• SS = seconds
• mmm = milliseconds
• UTC-00:00 = Time zone
Shows the timestamp of the last output short circuit or over-current fault. A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
ShortCircuitTimestamp LINT Refer NoLoadTimestamp for the format.
Shows the timestamp of the last dual channel fault. Refer to
DualChannelFaultTimestamp LINT A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
NoLoadTimestamp for the format.
Shows the timestamp of the last internal fault. Refer to NoLoadTimestamp
InternalFaultTimestamp LINT A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
for the format.

280 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Appendix E

Table 109 - Definition of members in Diagnostic Assembly Data Types

Data Definition
Name Valid Values
Type
LINT Shows the timestamp of the last overload fault. Refer to
OverloadTimestamp NoLoadTimestamp for the format. A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.

LINT Shows the timestamp of the last short circuit to ground fault. Refer to
ShortCircuitGroundTimestamp A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
NoLoadTimestamp for the format.
LINT Shows the timestamp of the last time field power turned on. Refer to
FieldPowerOnTimestamp A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
NoLoadTimestamp for the format.
LINT Shows the timestamp of the last time field power turned off. Refer to
FieldPowerOffTimestamp A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
NoLoadTimestamp for the format.
LINT Shows the timestamp of the last over temperature fault. Refer to
OverTemperatureTimestamp A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
NoLoadTimestamp for the format.
Shows the timestamp of the last critical temperature fault. Refer to
CriticalTemperatureTimestamp LINT NoLoadTimestamp A valid time or None if there is no recorded event time.
for the format.
INT Shows the number of CIP connections currently open to and through the
CIPConnections 0…32767
adapter.
Shows the running sum of the number of Sequenced Address Item
CIPLostPackets DINT Sequence Numbers that are skipped in Class 0 and Class 1 connections 0…2147483647
consumed by the adapter and its children.
DINT Shows the running count of the number of connections that time out, both
CIPTimeouts 0…2147483647
originated and targeted, to and through the adapter.
CPUUtilization INT Shows the usage of the compute engine. 0%…100%

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 281

Appendix E

Notes:

282 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Index

Numerics D
5069-AENTR, 5069-AENTRK, 5069-AEN2TR data transmission
EtherNet/IP adapters multicast method 37, 40
connect power data types 38, 41
power supply considerations 30 available with I/O modules 37, 40
5069-ARM address reserve module 29, 152 - 154 diagnostic assembly
5069-FPD field potential distributor 31 types 271
operation 31 user-defined
standard I/O modules 271
discrepancy 135 - 138
C
CIP Sync Time 72
compatibility
E
Logix 5000 controllers with Compact 5000 I/O events
digital modules 16 configuration 86
configuration event task 44
reset safety modules to out-of-box events category
configuration 198 5069-IB16F module 165 - 166
configure 5069-IB6F-3W module 171 - 172
with Logix Designer application 66
connection 14
connection category
F
5069-IA16 module 157 fast I/O module
5069-IB16, 5069-IB16K modules 157 CIP sync time 72
5069-IB16F module 157 filter times
5069-IB6F-3W module 157 digital input modules 77
5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK modules 190 firmware
5069-OA16 module 157 obtain from PCDC 71
5069-OB16, 5069-OB16K modules 157
5069-OB16F module 157
5069-OB8 module 157 G
5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK modules 190
5069-OW16 module 157 general category
5069-OW4I module 157 5069-IA16 module 155
5069-OX4I module 157 5069-IB16, 5069-IB16K modules 155
connection types 37, 40 5069-IB16F module 155
controller organizer 5069-IB6F-3W module 155
5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK modules 187
monitor tags 181, 195 5069-OA16 module 155
view module tags 181, 195 5069-OB16, 5069-OB16K modules 155
counters category 5069-OB16F 155
5069-IB16, 5069-IB16K modules 160 5069-OB8 module 155
5069-IB16F module 162 5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK modules 187
5069-IB6F-3W module 168 5069-OW16 module 155
5069-OW4I module 155
5069-OX4I module 155

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 283

Index

I M
I/O status indicators masters 14
digital output module 206 - 207 module definition
safety input modules 210 dialog box 156
safety output modules 212 safety modules 189
standard input modules 203 - 204 module info category
standard output modules 205 - 206 5069-IA16 module 158
input filter 5069-IB16, 5069-IB16K modules 158
5069-IA16 module 77 5069-IB16F module 158
5069-IB16, 5069-IB16K modules 77 5069-IB6F-3W module 158
5069-IB16F module 77 5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK modules 192
5069-IB6F-3W module 77 5069-OA16 module 158
5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK modules 78 5069-OB16, 5069-OB16K modules 158
input filter time 159, 161, 163, 169 5069-OB16F module 158
input points category 5069-OB8 module 158
5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK modules 193 5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK modules 192
5069-OW16 module 158
5069-OX4I module 158
L module location
local I/O modules 21, 43, 45 local I/O modules 21
remote I/O modules 22
locking tab 20 module status indicator 202
Logix 5000 controllers module tags
compatibility with Compact 5000 I/O digital definition 219
modules 16 naming 220
ownership of Compact 5000 I/O modules 26 tag editor 221
Logix Designer application 66 view 195
configuration overview 36 viewing 181
connection types 37, 40 module types 18
module definition multicast
safety modules 189
module tag definition 219 data broadcast method 43
name module tags 220
replace a safety module 196 - 200
reserve a module slot 152 - 154 N
reset safety modules to out-of-box no load detection
configuration 198 minimum time 102, 104
safety modules configuration 183 - 200 node address
safety network number 187, 196 reserve with 5069-ARM module 29, 152 - 154
standard I/O module configuration 143
tag editor 221
view module tags 181, 195 O
ODVA 14
output state
change time 116
ownership 26
multiple owners of input modules 26

284 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Index

P S
PCDC SA status indicator
obtain firmware 71 5069-IB8SK, 5069-IB8SK modules 210
PFD 14 5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK modules 212
See probability of failure on demand. safety category
PFH 14 5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK modules 191
See probability of failure per hour. 5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK modules 191
points category safety network number 14, 187
5069-IA16 module 159 set manually 196
5069-IB16, 5069-IB16K modules 161 scheduled output data
5069-IB16F module 163 - 164 fast I/O module 72
5069-IB6F-3W module 169 - 170 short circuit protection
5069-OA16 module 174 digital output modules 106
5069-OB16, 5069-OB16K modules 176 safety input modules 93
5069-OB16F module 177 simple count mode
5069-OB8 module 175 maximum frequency 83
5069-OBV8S, 5069-OBV8SK modules 194 slaves 14
5069-OW16 module 179
5069-OW4I module 178 SNN 14
5069-OX4I module 180 See safety network number.
power supply considerations standard I/O modules
5069-AENTR, 5069-AENTRK, 5069-AEN2TR configuration 143
EtherNet/IP adapters 30 status indicators
probability of failure safety input modules 209
on demand 14 I/O status indicators 210
per hour 14 SA status indicator 210
proof test 14 safety output modules 211
pulse latching 90 I/O status indicators 212
SA status indicator 212
standard input modules 203
I/O status indicators 203
R standard output modules 205
remote I/O modules 22, 44, 47 I/O status indicators 205 - 208
replace a safety module 196 - 200
reserve node address
with 5069-ARM module 29, 152 - 154
reset safety modules to out-of-box
configuration 198
RPI
valid value 42

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 285

Index

T
test output points category
5069-IB8S, 5069-IB8SK modules 194
thermal switch
digital output modules 113
safety input modules 95
time sync category
5069-IB16F module 167
5069-IB6F-3W module 173
time-scheduled output
accuracy 122
resolution 122
timestamping
CIP sync 72
input accuracy 84
input resolution 84
selection 163, 169
sequence of events 84
troubleshooting
connection category 215
general category 214
module Info category 215
module status indicator 20, 202
safety input modules
I/O status indicators 210
SA status indicator 210
safety output modules
I/O status indicators 212
SA status indicator 212
standard input modules
I/O status indicators 203
standard output modules
I/O status indicators 205 - 208
tag editor 218

V
voltage range
digital I/O module 18

286 Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

 Compact 5000 I/O Digital Modules User Manual

Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Resource Description
Compact 5000 I/O™ Field Potential Distributor Installation Instructions, publication 5069-IN001 Describes how to install and wire the 5069-FPD field potential distributor.
Compact 5000 I/O Address Reserve Module Installation Instructions, publication 5069-IN002 Describes how to install the 5069-ARM address reserve module.
Compact 5000 I/O EtherNet/IP Adapters Installation Instructions, publication 5069-IN003 Describes how to install the 5069-AENTR and 5069-AEN2TR EtherNet/IP™ adapters.
Describes how to install and wire the 5069-IB16, 5069-IB16F, and 5069-IB16K
Compact 5000 I/O Digital 16-point Sinking Input Modules Installation Instructions, publication 5069-IN004 input modules.
Compact 5000 I/O Digital 3-wire Sinking Input Module Installation Instructions, publication 5069-IN006 Describes how to install and wire the 5069-IB6F-3W input module.
Compact 5000 I/O Digital 16-point Sourcing Output Modules Installation Instructions, Describes how to install and wire the 5069-OB16, 5069-OB16F, and 5069-OB16K output
publication 5069-IN007 modules.
Compact 5000 I/O Digital 4-point Isolated Relay Output Module Installation Instructions, Describes how to install and wire the 5069-OW4I output module.
publication 5069-IN008
Compact 5000 I/O Digital 4-point Isolated Normally-open/Normally-closed Relay Output Module Installation Describes how to install and wire the 5069-OX4I output module.
Instructions, publication 5069-IN009
Compact 5000 I/O Analog 8-channel Current/Vole Input Module Installation Instructions, publication Describes how to install and wire the 5069-IF8 analog input module.
5069-IN010
Compact 5000 I/O Analog 4-channel Current/Vole/RTD/Thermocouple Input Module Installation Describes how to install and wire the 5069-IY4 and 5069-IY4K analog
Instructions, publication 5069-IN011 input modules.
Compact 5000 I/O Analog Current/Vole Output Modules Installation Instructions, publication 5069- Describes how to install and wire the 5069-OF4, 5069-OF4K, and 5069-OF8 analog
IN012 output modules.
Compact 5000 I/O Digital 16-point 120/240V AC Input Module Installation Instructions, Describes how to install and wire the 5069-IA16 input module.
publication 5069-IN015
Compact 5000 I/O Digital 16-point 120/240V AC Output Module Installation Instructions, Describes how to install and wire the 5069-OA16 output module.
publication 5069-IN016
Compact 5000 I/O Digital 8-point 24V DC Output Module Installation Instructions, publication 5069-IN017 Describes how to install and wire the 5069-OB8 output module.
Compact 5000 I/O Digital 16-point Relay Output Module Installation Instructions, publication 5069-IN018 Describes how to install and wire the 5069-OW16 output module.
Describes how to install and wire the 5069-IB8S and 5069-IB8SK safety
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Sinking Input Module Installation Instructions, publication 5069-IN020 input module.
Describes how to install and wire the 5069-OBV8S and 5069-OBV8SK safety
Compact 5000 I/O Safety Output Module Installation Instructions, publication 5069-IN021 output modules.
Compact 5000 I/O Modules and EtherNet/IP Adapters Specifications Technical Data, Provides specifications, wiring diagrams, and module block diagrams for
publication 5069-TD001 Compact 5000 I/O modules.
Describes how to configure, operate, and troubleshoot CompactLogix™ 5380 and
CompactLogix™ 5380 and Compact GuardLogix® 5380 Controllers User Manual, publication 5069-UM001 Compact GuardLogix 5380 controllers.
CompactLogix 5480 Controllers User Manual, publication 5069-UM002 Describes how to configure, operate, and troubleshoot CompactLogix 5480 controllers.
Describes how to configure, operate, and troubleshoot Compact 5000 I/O
Compact 5000 I/O Analog Modules User Manual, publication 5069-UM005 analog modules.
Compact 5000 I/O High-speed Counter Module User Manual, publication 5069-UM006 Describes how to use Compact 5000 I/O high-speed counter modules.
Compact 5000 EtherNet/IP Adapters User Manual, publication 5069-UM007 Describes how to use the 5069-AENTR and 5069-AEN2TR EtherNet/IP adapters.
Describes how to configure time-scheduled output control with the
Position-based Output Control with the MAOC Instruction, publication 1756-AT017 MAOC instruction.
Logix 5000™ Controllers Tasks, Programs, and Routines Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM005 Provides more information on event tasks and event task configuration.
Describes requirements for achieving and maintaining Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 2 and
GuardLogix and Compact GuardLogix 5380 Controller Systems Safety Reference Manual, Performance Level (PL) d requirements with the GuardLogix 5580 controller system,
publication 1756-RM012 using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application.
Describes how to configure, operate, and troubleshoot ControlLogix® 5580 and
ControlLogix® 5580 and GuardLogix 5580 Controllers User Manual, publication 1756-UM543 GuardLogix 5580 controllers.
The SISTEMA tool automates calculation of the attained Performance Level from the
SISTEMA Performance Level Calculator, available for download at: SISTEMA safety-related parts of a machine’s control system to (EN) ISO 13849-1.
Electronic Keying in Logix 5000 Control Systems Application Technique, publication LOGIX-AT001 Describes how to use electronic keying in Logix 5000 control system applications.
Provides information about CIP Sync™ technology and how to synchronize clocks
Integrated Architecture® and CIP Sync Configuration Application Technique, publication IA-AT003 within the Rockwell Automation® Integrated Architecture® system.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, rok.auto/certifications. Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.

You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.

Rockwell Automation Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022 287

Rockwell Automation Support
Use these resources to access support information.
Technical Support Center Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, and product notification updates. rok.auto/support
Knowledgebase Access Knowledgebase articles. rok.auto/knowledgebase
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the telephone number for your country. rok.auto/phonesupport
Literature Library Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications. rok.auto/literature
Product Compatibility and Download Center Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product release rok.auto/pcdc
(PCDC) notes.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our
content, complete the form at rok.auto/docfeedback.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental compliance information on its website at rok.auto/pec.

Allen-Bradley, Compact 5000, CompactLogix, ControlLogix, GuardLogix, Integrated Architecture, Kinetix, Logix 5000, PanelView, PowerFlex, Rockwell Automation, Studio 5000 Logix Designer, and Stratix
are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
CIP, CIP Safety, CIP Sync, ControlNet, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752, İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

Publication 5069-UM004F-EN-P - June 2022

5069-UM004E-EN-P - March 2022 Copyright © 2022 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.